Casio 3.04 manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954

Go to page of

A good user manual

The rules should oblige the seller to give the purchaser an operating instrucion of Casio 3.04, along with an item. The lack of an instruction or false information given to customer shall constitute grounds to apply for a complaint because of nonconformity of goods with the contract. In accordance with the law, a customer can receive an instruction in non-paper form; lately graphic and electronic forms of the manuals, as well as instructional videos have been majorly used. A necessary precondition for this is the unmistakable, legible character of an instruction.

What is an instruction?

The term originates from the Latin word „instructio”, which means organizing. Therefore, in an instruction of Casio 3.04 one could find a process description. An instruction's purpose is to teach, to ease the start-up and an item's use or performance of certain activities. An instruction is a compilation of information about an item/a service, it is a clue.

Unfortunately, only a few customers devote their time to read an instruction of Casio 3.04. A good user manual introduces us to a number of additional functionalities of the purchased item, and also helps us to avoid the formation of most of the defects.

What should a perfect user manual contain?

First and foremost, an user manual of Casio 3.04 should contain:
- informations concerning technical data of Casio 3.04
- name of the manufacturer and a year of construction of the Casio 3.04 item
- rules of operation, control and maintenance of the Casio 3.04 item
- safety signs and mark certificates which confirm compatibility with appropriate standards

Why don't we read the manuals?

Usually it results from the lack of time and certainty about functionalities of purchased items. Unfortunately, networking and start-up of Casio 3.04 alone are not enough. An instruction contains a number of clues concerning respective functionalities, safety rules, maintenance methods (what means should be used), eventual defects of Casio 3.04, and methods of problem resolution. Eventually, when one still can't find the answer to his problems, he will be directed to the Casio service. Lately animated manuals and instructional videos are quite popular among customers. These kinds of user manuals are effective; they assure that a customer will familiarize himself with the whole material, and won't skip complicated, technical information of Casio 3.04.

Why one should read the manuals?

It is mostly in the manuals where we will find the details concerning construction and possibility of the Casio 3.04 item, and its use of respective accessory, as well as information concerning all the functions and facilities.

After a successful purchase of an item one should find a moment and get to know with every part of an instruction. Currently the manuals are carefully prearranged and translated, so they could be fully understood by its users. The manuals will serve as an informational aid.

Table of contents for the manual

  • Page 1

    ClassPad 330 ClassPad OS Version 3.04 User’s Guide E CASIO Education website URL http://edu.casio.com ClassPad website URL http://edu.casio.com/products/classpad/ ClassPad register URL http://edu.casio.com/dl/[...]

  • Page 2

    GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THE UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas). NO TICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential i[...]

  • Page 3

    20090601 Getting Read y This section contains important information you need to know before using the ClassPad for the first time. 1. Unpac king When unpacking your ClassPad, check to make sure that all of the items shown here are included. If anything is missing, contact your original retailer immediately. Quick Start Guide ClassP ad Stylus (Inser[...]

  • Page 4

    20060301 2. Attaching and Remo ving the Front Co ver S T o remo ve the front co ver Before using the ClassPad, remove the front cover and attach it to the back. S T o attach the fr ont co ver When you are not using the ClassPad, attach the front cover to the front. 2 Getting Ready Impor tant! • Always attach the front cover to the ClassPad whenev[...]

  • Page 5

    20060301 4. Replacing Batterie s and Setting Up the Cla ss Pa d S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Making sure that you do not accidentally press the 0 key, attach the front cover to the ClassPad and then turn the ClassPad over. Remove the battery cover from the ClassPad by pulling with your finger at the point marked  . (2) Load the four batteries tha[...]

  • Page 6

    20060301 b. Tap the center of each of the four cross marks as they appear on the display. • If the Touch Panel Alignment screen does not appear, use the stylus to press the P button on the back of the ClassPad. Impor tant! • It may take a little time for your ClassPad to start up after you press the P button. (6) Adjust the display contrast. a.[...]

  • Page 7

    20060301 (7) Specify the display language. a. On the list that appears, tap the language you want to use. • You can select German, English, Spanish, French, or Portuguese. b. When the language you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects English and advances to the next dialog box. (8) Specify the soft keyboard key arrangement. a[...]

  • Page 8

    20060301 20070301 6 Getting Ready (10) Configure power properties. a. Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page 16-6-1 for details about these settings. b. When the configurations are the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects “1 day” for [Power Sav[...]

  • Page 9

    20060301 20070301 Handling Pr ecautions • Your ClassPad is made of precision components. Never try to take it apart. • Avoid dropping your ClassPad and subjecting it to strong impact. • Do not store the ClassPad or leave it in areas exposed to high temperatures or humidity, or large amounts of dust. When exposed to low temperatures, the Class[...]

  • Page 10

    20060301 20080201 Be s ure to keep ph y s ical record s of all important data! Low battery power or incorrect replacement of the batteries that power the ClassPad can cause the data stored in memory to be corrupted or even lost entirely. Stored data can also be affected by strong electrostatic charge or strong impact. It is up to you to keep back u[...]

  • Page 11

    20060301 20090601 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • [...]

  • Page 12

    20060301 Content s Getting Ready 1. Unpac king ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Attaching and Removing the Fr ont Co ver ................................................. 2 3. U s ing the Stylu s ................................................................................[...]

  • Page 13

    20060301 1-7 V ariable s and Folder s .......................................................................... 1-7-1 Folder Types ....................................................................................................... 1-7-1 Variable Types .............................................................................................[...]

  • Page 14

    20090601 3 Contents 2-6 Matrix and V ector Calculation s ............................................................ 2-6-1 Inputting Matrix Data .......................................................................................... 2-6-1 Performing Matrix Calculations ........................................................................... [...]

  • Page 15

    20060301 2-12 U s ing Pr obability ................................................................................ 2-12-1 Starting Up Probability ......................................................................................2-12-2 Probability Menus and Buttons .........................................................................2-12-2 [...]

  • Page 16

    20060301 3-7 U s ing T race ............................................................................................ 3-7-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates ........................................................... 3-7-1 Linking Trace to a Number Table ....................................................................... 3-7-3 Generatin[...]

  • Page 17

    20060301 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Function s ............................................... 5-5-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates ........................................................... 5-5-1 Inserting Text into a 3D Graph Window .............................................................. 5-5-1 Calculating a z -value for Particu[...]

  • Page 18

    20060301 7-5 Graphing P aired-V ariable Stati s tical Data ........................................... 7-5-1 Drawing a Scatter Plot and xy Line Graph ......................................................... 7-5-1 Drawing a Regression Graph ............................................................................. 7-5-2 Graphing Previously Calcu[...]

  • Page 19

    20060301 8-3 Editing Figure s ...................................................................................... 8-3-1 Selecting and Deselecting Figures ..................................................................... 8-3-1 Moving and Copying Figures ..............................................................................8-3-3 Pinnin[...]

  • Page 20

    20060301 10-4 W orking with eActivity File s ............................................................... 10-4-1 Opening an Existing eActivity ........................................................................... 10-4-1 Browsing the Contents of an eActivity .............................................................. 10-4-2 Editing the C[...]

  • Page 21

    20090601 12-3 Debug ging a Program ......................................................................... 12-3-1 Debugging After an Error Message Appears .................................................... 12-3-1 Debugging a Program Following Unexpected Results ..................................... 12-3-1 Modifying an Existing Program to Create[...]

  • Page 22

    20090601 Paste .............................................................................................................. 13-4-11 Specifying Text or Calculation as the Data Type for a Particular Cell ............ 13-4-13 Using Drag and Drop to Copy Cell Data within a Spreadsheet ...................... 13-4-14 Using Drag and Drop to Obtain Sprea[...]

  • Page 23

    20060301 14-5 Drawing f ( x ) T ype Function Graph s and P arametric Function Graph s .................................................................................................. 14-5-1 Drawing an f ( x ) Type Function Graph .............................................................. 14-5-1 Drawing a Parametric Function Graph .............[...]

  • Page 24

    20060301 13 Contents 15-8 Da y Count ............................................................................................ 15-8-1 Day Count Fields .............................................................................................. 15-8-1 Financial Application Default Setup for Examples ............................................ [...]

  • Page 25

    20060301 20070301 14 Contents 16-8 Specifying the Font Set ...................................................................... 16-8-1 16-9 Specifying the Alphabetic Ke yboard Arrangement ......................... 16-9-1 16-10 Optimizing “Fla s h R OM” ................................................................... 16-10-1 16-11 Specifyin[...]

  • Page 26

    20060301 About Thi s U s er’ s Guide This section explains the symbols that are used in this user’s guide to represent keys, stylus operations, display elements, and other items you encounter while operating your ClassPad. Cla ss P ad K eypad and Icon P anel  Keypad  Icon panel  Cursor key  Ke ypad ClassPad keypad keys are represent[...]

  • Page 27

    20060301 On- s creen Ke y s , Menu s , and Other Controller s  Menu bar  Menu bar Menu names and commands are indicated in text by enclosing them inside of brackets. The following examples show typical menu operations. Example 1: Tap the menu and then tap [Keyboard].  Toolbar  Soft keyboard Tabs Example 2: Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and [...]

  • Page 28

    20060301  T oolbar Toolbar button operations are indicated by illustrations that look like the button you need to tap. Example 1: Tap  to graph the functions. Example 2: Tap  to open the Stat Editor window.  Soft keyboar d Key operations on the soft keyboards that appear when you press the . key are indicated by illustrations that look [...]

  • Page 29

    20060301 Getting Acquainted 1-1 General Guide 1-2 T urning P ower On and Off 1-3 U s ing the Icon P anel 1-4 Built-in Application s 1-5 Built-in Application Ba s ic Operation s 1-6 Input 1-7 V ariable s and Folder s 1-8 U s ing the V ariable Manager 1-9 Configuring Application Format Setting s Chapter 1[...]

  • Page 30

    20060301 1-1 General Guide Fr ont 1-1-1 General Guide Side Bac k              = ( ) , (–) xz ^ y  ÷ − + EXE K ey board ON/OF F Clea r smMrSh 7 4 1 0 8 5 2 9 6 3 . EXP  P[...]

  • Page 31

    20060301 General Guide The numbers next to each of the items below correspond to the numbers in the illustration on page 1-1-1. Fr ont  T ouch s creen The touch screen shows calculation formulas, calculation results, graphs and other information. The stylus that comes with the ClassPad can be used to input data and perform other operations by ta[...]

  • Page 32

    20060301  Ke ypad Use these keys to input the values and operators marked on them. See “1-6 Input” for details.   key Press this key to execute a calculation operation or enter a return. Side  3-pin data communication port Connect the data communication cable here to communicate with another ClassPad unit or a CASIO Data Analyzer. S[...]

  • Page 33

    20060301 Impor tant! • Be sure that you do not misplace or lose the stylus. Keep the stylus in the holder on the right side of the ClassPad whenever you are not using it. • Do not allow the tip of the stylus to become damaged. Using a stylus with a damaged tip to perform touch screen operations can damage the touch screen. • Use only the styl[...]

  • Page 34

    20060301 1-2 T urning P ower On and Off T urning P ower On You can turn on the ClassPad either by pressing the 0 key or by tapping the touch screen with the stylus. • Turning on the ClassPad (while it is in the sleep state) displays the window that was on the display when you last turned it off. See “Resume Function” below. • Note that you [...]

  • Page 35

    20060301 1-2-2 T ur ning P ower On and Off Limiting the Duration of the Sleep State You can use the [Power Save Mode] setting (page 16-6-1) to limit the duration of the sleep state that is entered by the Resume function. If you have “1 day” specified for [Power Save Mode], for example, the ClassPad remains in the sleep state for one day after p[...]

  • Page 36

    20060301 1-3 U s ing the Icon P anel The icon panel of seven permanent icons is located below the touch screen. Tapping an icon executes the function assigned to it. The table below explains what you can do with the icon panel icons. Function When y ou want to do thi s : T ap thi s icon: Display the menu to configure settings, switch to the applica[...]

  • Page 37

    20060301 T o perform thi s type of operation: Select thi s icon: See Chapter: 2 10 7 13 3 6 4 5 8 9 11 12 • Access the eActivity function • General calculations, including function calculations • Matrix calculations • Computer Algebra System • Create a list • Perform statistical calculations • Draw a statistical graph • Input data i[...]

  • Page 38

    20060301 Star ting a Built-in Application Perform the steps below to start a built-in application. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the icon panel, tap / to display the application menu. (2) If you cannot see the icon of the application you want on the menu, tap the scroll buttons or drag the scroll bar to bring other icons into view. (3) Tap an icon[...]

  • Page 39

    20090601 • Displaying applications according to group (Additional Applications, All Applications) See “Using Application Groups” below. • Moving or swapping icons See “Moving an Icon” below, and “Swapping Two Icons” on page 1-4-4. • Deleting an application See “Deleting an Application” on page A -2-1. I U s ing Application Gro[...]

  • Page 40

    20060301 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the icon panel, tap / to display the application menu. (2) Tap at the top left of the application menu. • This opens a menu of setting options. (3) Tap [Move Icon]. (4) Tap the icon you want to move (  in this example). • This selects the icon. (5) Tap the icon that you want the first icon to follow ( [...]

  • Page 41

    20060301 1-5 Built-in Application Ba s ic Operation s This section explains basic information and operations that are common to all of the built-in applications. Application Window The following shows the basic configuration of a built-in application window. U s ing a Dual Window Di s pla y Many applications split the display between an upper windo[...]

  • Page 42

    20060301 When using two windows, the currently selected window (the one where you can perform operations) is called the “active window”. The menu bar, toolbar, and status bar contents are all applicable to the active window. The active window is indicated by a thick boundary around it. S To s witc h the active window While a dual window is on t[...]

  • Page 43

    20060301 20080201 (3) Tap [lim]. • This inputs “lim(”. Example 1: Choosing the [Edit] menu’s [Copy] item S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap [Edit]. (2) Tap [Copy]. Example 2: Choosing [lim], which is on the [Calculation] submenu of the [Action] menu. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap [Action]. (2) Tap [Calculation]. 1-5-3 Built-in Application Ba[...]

  • Page 44

    20060301 U s ing the Menu The menu appears at the top left of the window of each application, except for the System application. You can access the menu by tapping 3 on the icon panel, or by tapping the menu bar’s menu. I Menu Item s The following describes all of the items that appear on the menu.  Tapping [Variable Manager] starts up the Var[...]

  • Page 45

    20060301 I U s ing the Menu to Acce ss Windo w s Most ClassPad applications support simultaneous display of two windows. When two windows are on the display, the one with a thick selection boundary around it is the active window. The displayed menu and toolbar are the ones for the currently active window. You can use the menu to change the active w[...]

  • Page 46

    20060301 1-5-6 Built-in Application Basic Operations U s ing Chec k Bo xe s A check box shows the current status of a dialog box option that can be turned on or off. An option is turned on (selected) when its check box has a check mark inside it. An option is turned off when a check box is cleared. Tapping a check box toggles the option on (checked[...]

  • Page 47

    20060301 1-5-7 Built-in Application Basic Operations U s ing Option Button s Option buttons are used on dialog boxes that present you with a list of options from which you can select only one. A black option button indicates the currently selected option, while the buttons of the options that are not selected are white. Option buttons also appear o[...]

  • Page 48

    20060301 U s ing the T oolbar The toolbar is located directly underneath the menu bar of an application window. It contains the buttons for the currently active window. I T oggling between Multiple T oolbar s With some applications, not all of the buttons can fit on a single toolbar. When this happens, the buttons that cannot fit are placed onto a [...]

  • Page 49

    20060301 Interpreting Statu s Bar Inf ormation The status bar appears along the bottom of the window of each application.  Information about current application Tip • You can change the configuration of a setting indicated in the status bar by tapping it. Tapping “Cplx” (indicating complex number calculations) while the Main application is[...]

  • Page 50

    20060301 Break dialog box 1-5-10 Built-in Application Basic Operations Example: To pause a graphing operation and then resume it S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Use the Graph & Table application to draw a graph. • For details about graphing, see “Chapter 3 – Using the Graph & Table Application”. (2) While the graph is being drawn, pres[...]

  • Page 51

    20060301 1-6 Input You can input data on the ClassPad using its keypad or by using the on-screen soft keyboard. Virtually all data input required by your ClassPad can be performed using the soft keyboard. The keypad keys are used for input of frequently used data like numbers, arithmetic operators, etc. U s ing the Soft Ke yboar d The soft keyboard[...]

  • Page 52

    20090601 I Soft Ke yboar d Style s There are four different soft keyboard styles as described below. • Math (mth) Ke yboard Pressing . will display the keyboard that you last displayed while working in that application. If you quit the application and go into another application, then the  (default) soft keyboard appears. You can use the math [...]

  • Page 53

    20090601 I Selecting a Soft Ke yboar d Style Tap one of the tabs along the top of the soft keyboard (  ,  ,  , or  ) to select the keyboard style you want. 1-6-3 Input To display the 2D keyboard Tap here. Input Ba s ic s This section includes a number of examples that illustrate how to perform basic input procedures. All of the procedur[...]

  • Page 54

    20060301 1-6-4 Input Example 2: To simplify 2 (5 + 4) w (23 s 5) S Cla ss P ad Operation U s ing the keypad ke y s ;;*     U s ing the s oft keyboar d Tap the keys of the math (mth) keyboard or the 2D keyboard to input the calculation expression. ; *  (or  ) ADCABD U Tip • As sh[...]

  • Page 55

    20060301 S T o delete an unneeded key operation Use B and C to move the cursor to the location immediately to the right of the key operation you want to delete, and then press  . Each press of  deletes one command to the left of the cursor. Example: To change the expression 369 s s 2 to 369 s 2 (1) * (2) B  Tip • You ca[...]

  • Page 56

    20060301 S T o in s er t new input into the mid dle of an exi s ting calculation e xpre ss ion Use B or C to move the cursor to the location where you want to insert new input, and then input what you want. Example: To change 2.36 2 to sin(2.36 2 ) (1) *  ABE V (2) BBBBBB (3) 3 Q Tip • You can move the cursor without using the cursor key by[...]

  • Page 57

    20060301 I U s ing the Clipboard f or Copy and P a s te You can copy (or cut) a function, command, or other input to the ClassPad’s clipboard, and then paste the clipboard contents at another location. S T o copy c haracter s (1) Drag the stylus across the characters you want to copy to select them. (2) On the soft keyboard, tap & . • This [...]

  • Page 58

    20060301 1-6-8 Input S Copying and pa s ting in the me ss a ge box The “message box” is a 1-line input and display area under the Graph window (see Chapter 3). You can use the two buttons to the right of the message box to copy the message box contents ( & button), or to paste the clipboard contents to the message box ( ' button). Cop[...]

  • Page 59

    20060301 1-6-9 Input S 3 key s et Tapping the 3 key displays keys for inputting trigonometric functions, and changes the 3 softkey to ( . You can tap this key to toggle between 3 and the default  keyboard. Tapping the  (hyperbolic) key switches to a key set for inputting hyperbolic functions. Tap the  key again to return to the regular 3 k[...]

  • Page 60

    20090601 1-6-10 Input Tip • As its name suggests, a single-character variable is a variable name that consists of a single character like “ a ” or “ x ”. Each character you input on the 5 keyboard is treated as a single- character variable. To input multiple-character variable names like “ab” or multiple-character strings, you must us[...]

  • Page 61

    20060301 • Tap ( to return to the initial alphabet (abc) key set. S 2 key s et Use this key set to input punctuation and symbols. Tap the ) and * buttons to scroll to additional keys. 1-6-11 Input • Tap ( to return to the initial alphabet (abc) key set. S L key s et This key set contains some of the mathematical expression symbols that are also[...]

  • Page 62

    20060301 1-6-12 Input I U s ing Single-character V ariable s As its name suggests, a single-character variable is a variable name that consists of a single character like “ a ” or “ x ”. Input of single-character variable names is subject to different rules than input of a series of multiple characters (like “abc”). S T o input a s ingl[...]

  • Page 63

    20060301 S T o input a s erie s of m ultiple character s A series of multiple characters (like “list1”) can be used for variable names, program commands, comment text, etc. Always use the alphabet (abc) keyboard when you want to input a series of characters. Example: ?@A U You can also use the alphabet (abc) keyboard to input single-characte[...]

  • Page 64

    20060301 S Catalog (cat) keyboard configuration 1-6-14 Input This is an alphabetized list of commands, functions, and other items available in the category currently selected with “Form”. Tap the down button and then select the category you want ([Func], [Cmd], [Sys], [User], or [All]) from the list that appears. Tapping a letter button display[...]

  • Page 65

    20090601 1-6-15 Input I U s ing the 2D Keyboar d The 2D keyboard provides you with a number of templates that let you input fractions, exponential values, n th roots, matrices, differentials, integrals, and other complex expressions as they appear in your textbook. It also includes a 5 key set that you can use to input single-character variables li[...]

  • Page 66

    20090601 T o input thi s : U s e the s e key s : For more information, s ee: Sum of product template “ 0 ” under “Using the Calculation Submenu” on page 2-8-15. Differential coefficient template , “diff” under “Using the Calculation Submenu” on page 2-8-13. Integration template / “ ° ” under “Using the Calculation Submenu” [...]

  • Page 67

    20060301 S 5 key s et Tapping the 5 key displays keys for inputting single-character variables, and changes the 5 softkey to ( . You can tap this key to toggle between 5 and the initial 2D keyboard. Tapping the $ key switches to a key set for inputting upper-case single-character variables. Tip • As its name suggests, a single-character variable [...]

  • Page 68

    20060301 1-6-18 Input Tip • If you want your ClassPad to evaluate a calculation expression and display a result in the eActivity application, you must input the calculation in a calculation row. See “Inserting a Calculation Row” on page 10-3-3. Example 2: To input (1) Tap  to display the 2D keyboard and then tap  . (2) Tap . (3) In the [...]

  • Page 69

    20060301 1-6-19 Input (4) Tap with the stylus to move the cursor to the other input locations to enter the limits of integration. In the input box above ° , tap @ . In the input box below ° , tap ? . (5) After everything is the way you want, press  .[...]

  • Page 70

    20060301 1-7-1 V ar iables and F olders 1-7 V ariable s and Folder s Your ClassPad lets you register text strings as v ar iab les . You can then use a variable to store a value, expression, string, list, matrix, etc. A variable can be recalled by a calculation to access its contents. Variables are stored in folders. In addition to the default folde[...]

  • Page 71

    20060301 I Current Folder The current f older is the folder where the variables created by applications (excluding eActivity) are stored and from which such variables can be accessed. The initial default current folder is the “main” folder. You can also select a user folder you created as the current folder. For more information about how to do[...]

  • Page 72

    20060301 I V ariable Data T ype s ClassPad variables support a number of data types . The type of data assigned to a variable is indicated by a data type name . Data type names are shown on the Variable Manager variable list, and on the Select Data dialog box that appears when you are specifying a variable in any ClassPad application. The following[...]

  • Page 73

    20060301 Creating a Folder You can have up to 87 user folders in memory at the same time. This section explains how to create a user folder and explains the rules that cover folder names. You can create a folder using either the Variable Manager or the “NewFolder” command. I Creating a f older u s ing the V ariable Manager On the Variable Manag[...]

  • Page 74

    20060301 (4) Tap U to execute the command. • The message “done” appears on the display to let you know that command execution is complete. 1-7-5 V ar iables and F olders Tip • You can use the Variable Manager to view the contents of a folder you create. For more information, see “1-8 Using the Variable Manager”. • For information abou[...]

  • Page 75

    20060301 I Single-character V ariable Precaution s Your ClassPad supports the use of single-character v ariables , which are variables whose names consist of a single character like “ a ” or “ x ”. Some ClassPad keys ( 7 , 8 , ' keypad keys, math (mth) soft keyboard 7 , 8 , 9 , : keys, 5 key set keys, etc.) are dedicated single-charact[...]

  • Page 76

    20060301 1-7-7 V ar iables and F olders Tip • As shown in the above example, assigning something to a variable with a name that does not yet exist in the current folder causes a new variable with that name to be created. If a variable with the specified name already exists in the current folder, the contents of the existing variable are replaced [...]

  • Page 77

    20060301 1-7-8 V ar iables and F olders I “library” Folder V ariable s Variables in the “library” folder can be accessed without specifying a path name, regardless of the current folder. Example: To create and access two variables, one located in the “library” folder and one located in another folder S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) With “[...]

  • Page 78

    20060301 1-7-9 V ar iables and F olders eq2 U Tip • Specifying a variable name that exists in both the current folder and the “library” folder causes the variable in the current folder to be accessed. For details about the variable access priority sequence and how to access variables in particular folders, see “Rules Governing Variable Acce[...]

  • Page 79

    20060301 1-7-10 V ar iables and F olders A ss igning V alue s and Other Data to a Sy s tem V ariable As its name suggests, a system v ar iab le is a variable that is created and used by the system (page 1-7-5). Some system variables allow you to assign values and other data to them, while some system variables do not. For more information about whi[...]

  • Page 80

    20060301 1-7-11 V ar iables and F olders Rule s Go verning V ariable Acce ss Normally, you access a variable by specifying its variable name. The rules in this section apply when you need to reference a variable that is not located in the current folder or to access a variable that has the same name as one or more variables located in other folders[...]

  • Page 81

    20060301 1-8-1 Using the V ariable Manager 1-8 U s ing the V ariable Mana ger The Variable Manager is a tool for managing user variables, programs, user functions, and other types of data. Though this section uses only the term “variables”, the explanations provided here also refer to the other types of data that can be managed by the Variable [...]

  • Page 82

    20060301 • Tapping a folder name on the folder list selects it. Tapping the folder name again displays the folder’s contents; a variable list. Current folder Folder names Number of variables contained in the folder Folder List Number of variables contained in the folder Variable names Variable data types (page 1-7-3) and sizes (bytes) Variable [...]

  • Page 83

    20060301 V ariable Manager Folder Operation s This section describes the various folder operations you can perform using the Variable Manager. I Specifying the Current Folder The “current folder” is the folder where the variables created by applications (excluding eActivity) are stored and from which such variables can be accessed. The initial [...]

  • Page 84

    20060301 I Selecting and De s electing Folder s The folder operations you perform are performed on the currently selected folders. The folders that are currently selected on the folder list are those whose check boxes are selected (checked). You can use the following operations to select and deselect folders as required. T o do thi s : Do thi s : S[...]

  • Page 85

    20060301 1-8-5 Using the V ariable Manager • You cannot delete the “library” folder or the “main” folder. • If no check box is currently selected on the folder list, the folder whose name is currently highlighted on the list is deleted when you tap [Edit] and then [Delete]. • An error message appears and the folder is not deleted if a[...]

  • Page 86

    20060301 I Inputting a Folder Name into an Application Perform the procedure below when you want to input the name of a folder displayed on the Variable Manager window into the application from which you started up the Variable Manager. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In the Main application, Graph & Table application, or some other application, m[...]

  • Page 87

    20060301 V ariable Operation s This section explains the various operations you can perform on the Variable Manager variables. I Opening a Folder Perform the steps below to open a folder and display the variables contained inside it. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Start up the Variable Manager and display the folder list. (2) Tap the name of the folde[...]

  • Page 88

    20060301 1-8-8 Using the V ariable Manager (3) On the dialog box, tap the down arrow button and then select the data type from the list that appears. • To display variables for all data types, select [All]. • For details about data type names and variables, see “Variable Data Types” on page 1-7-3. (4) After selecting the data type you want,[...]

  • Page 89

    20060301 1-8-9 Using the V ariable Manager I Deleting a V ariable Perform the following steps when you want to delete a variable. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Open the folder that contains the variable you want to delete and display the variable list. (2) Select the check box next to the variable you want to delete. • To delete multiple variables,[...]

  • Page 90

    20060301 Tip • If no check box is currently selected on the variable list, the variable whose name is currently highlighted on the list is copied or moved. • If a variable with the same name already exists in the destination folder, the variable in the destination folder is replaced with the one that you are copying or moving. • An error mess[...]

  • Page 91

    20060301 1-8-11 Using the V ariable Manager S T o unloc k a variab le (1) Open the folder that contains the variable you want to unlock and display the variable list. (2) Select the check box next to the variable you want to unlock. (3) Tap [Edit] and then [Unlock]. I Sear ching f or a V ariable You can use the following procedure to search the “[...]

  • Page 92

    20060301 1-8-12 Using the V ariable Manager Example of EXPR variable contents I Viewing the Content s of a V ariable You can use the Variable Manager to view the contents of a particular variable. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Open the folder that contains the variable whose contents you want to view and display on the variable list. (2) Tap the nam[...]

  • Page 93

    20060301 1-8-13 Using the V ariable Manager I Inputting a V ariable Name into an Application Perform the procedure below when you want to input the name of a variable from the Variable Manager window into the application from which you started up the Variable Manager. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In the Main application, Graph & Table applicati[...]

  • Page 94

    20060301 1-9 Configuring Application Format Setting s The menu includes format settings for configuring the number of calculation result display digits and the angle unit, as well as application-specific commands. The following describes each of the settings and commands that are available on the menu. T o do thi s : Select thi s menu command: Spec[...]

  • Page 95

    20060301 Specifying a V ariable Certain settings require that you specify variables. If you specify a user-stored variable when configuring the setting of such an item, you must specify the folder where the variable is stored and the variable name. Example: To use [Table Variable] on the [Special] tab of the Graph Format dialog box for configuring [...]

  • Page 96

    20060301 (7) Tap [Set] to save your settings. Initializing All Application Format Setting s Perform the following procedure when you want to return all application format settings to their initial defaults. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap , or tap 3 on the icon panel, and then tap [Default Setup]. (2) In response to the “Reset Setup Data?” mes[...]

  • Page 97

    20060301 1-9-4 Configuring Application Format Settings Application Format Setting s This section provides details about all of the settings you can configure using the application format settings. The following two points apply to all of the dialog boxes. • Some settings involve turning options on or off. Selecting a check box next to an option ([...]

  • Page 98

    20060301 1-9-5 Configuring Application Format Settings S Number Format To s pecify thi s type of numeric v alue di s play f ormat: Select thi s s etting: Auto exponential display for values less than 10 –2 and from 10 10 or greater (when you are in the Decimal mode) Normal 1* Auto exponential display for values less than 10 –9 and from 10 10 or[...]

  • Page 99

    20060301 I Graph Format Dialog Bo x Use the Graph Format dialog box to configure settings for the Graph window and for drawing graphs. 1-9-6 Configuring Application Format Settings Ba s ic T ab S Axes T o do thi s : Select thi s s etting: Turn on display of Graph window axes On* Turn on display of Graph window axes along with maximum and minimum va[...]

  • Page 100

    20060301 T o do thi s : Do thi s : Turn on display of Graph window pointer coordinates Select the [Coordinates] check box.* Turn off display of Graph window pointer coordinates Clear the [Coordinates] check box. Turn on display of leading cursor during graphing Select the [Leading Cursor] check box. Turn off display of leading cursor during graphin[...]

  • Page 101

    20060301 1-9-8 Configuring Application Format Settings S Coordinates T o do thi s : Select thi s s etting: Display coordinate values using rectangular coordinates Rectangular* Display coordinate values using polar coordinates Polar Turn off display of coordinates Off S Axes T o do thi s : Select thi s s etting: Display axes normally On Display box [...]

  • Page 102

    20060301 1-9-9 Configuring Application Format Settings • The above is the same as the [G-Controller] setting on the Graph Format dialog box. S G-Controller T o do thi s : Do thi s : Turn on display of graph controller arrows during graphing Select the [G-Controller] check box. Turn off display of graph controller arrows during graphing Clear the [...]

  • Page 103

    20060301 1-9-10 Configuring Application Format Settings S Function Angle To s pecify the angle unit for graphing: Select thi s s etting: Radian Radian* Degree Degree Grad Grad S Axes To s et the initial Graph window axe s condition when opening the Geometry application: Select thi s s etting: Turn on display of Graph window axes On Turn on display [...]

  • Page 104

    20060301 1-9-11 Configuring Application Format Settings I Adv anced Format Dialog Box Use the Advanced Format dialog box to configure settings for Fourier transform and FFT settings. S FFT T o do thi s : Select thi s s etting: Specify Pure Math for FFT scaling constant Pure Math Specify Signal Processing for FFT scaling constant Signal Processing* [...]

  • Page 105

    20060301 1-9-12 Configuring Application Format Settings I Financial Format Dialog Bo x Use the Financial Format dialog box to configure settings for the Financial application. Ba s ic T ab S Days in Year T o do thi s : Select thi s s etting: Specify a 360-day year 360 days* Specify a 365-day year 365 days S Payment Date T o do thi s : Select thi s [...]

  • Page 106

    20060301 1-9-13 Configuring Application Format Settings Special T ab S Odd Period T o do thi s : Select thi s s etting: Specify compound interest for odd (partial) months Compound (CI) Specify simple interest for odd (partial) months Simple (SI) Specify no separation of full and odd (partial) months Off* S Compounding Frequency T o do thi s : Selec[...]

  • Page 107

    20060301 1-9-14 Configuring Application Format Settings I Pre s entation Dialog Bo x Use the Presentation dialog box to configure settings for the Presentation application. For full details about the Presentation application, see Chapter 11. T o do thi s : Do thi s : Send hard copy data to an external device Select “Outer Device” for [Screen Co[...]

  • Page 108

    20060301 1-9-15 Configuring Application Format Settings I Comm unication Dialog Bo x Use the Communication dialog box to configure communication settings. For full details about the Communication application, see Chapter 17. S Speed (3Pin) To s pecify thi s data rate for 3-pin comm unication: Select thi s s etting: 9,600 bps 9600 bps 38,400 bps 384[...]

  • Page 109

    20060301 2 U s ing the Main Application The Main application is a general-purpose numerical and mathematical calculation application that you can use to study mathematics and solve mathematical problems. You can use the Main application to perform general operations from basic arithmetic calculations, to calculations that involve lists, matrices, e[...]

  • Page 110

    20060301 2-1-1 Main Application Ov er view 2-1 Main Application Over vie w This section provides information about the following. • Main application windows • Modes that determine how calculations and their results are displayed • Menus and their commands Star ting Up the Main Application Use the following procedure to start up the Main appli[...]

  • Page 111

    20090601 • Basic Main application operations consist of inputting a calculation expression into the work area and pressing  . This performs the calculation and then displays its result on the right side of the work area. Calculation result Input expression • Calculation results are displayed in natural format, with mathematical expressions a[...]

  • Page 112

    20060301 T o do this: Select this menu item: Undo the last operation or redo an operation that was just undone Edit - Undo/Redo Cut the selected character string and place it onto the clipboard Edit - Cut Copy the selected character string and place it onto the clipboard Edit - Copy Paste the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor position[...]

  • Page 113

    20060301 U s ing Main Application Mode s The Main application has a number of different modes that control how calculation results are displayed, as well as other factors. The current mode is indicated in the status bar. I Statu s Bar Mode Indicator s 2-1-4 Main Application Ov er view • You can tap a mode name in the status bar to change it, or u[...]

  • Page 114

    20060301 Acce ss ing Cla ss P ad Application Window s fr om the Main Application Tapping the down arrow button on the toolbar displays a palette of 15 icons that you can use to access certain windows of other ClassPad applications. Tapping the  button, for example, splits the display into two windows, with the Stat Editor window of the Statistic[...]

  • Page 115

    20060301 • You can perform drag and drop operations with expressions between the Main application work area and the currently displayed window. For example, you could drag an expression from the Main application work area to the Graph window, and graph the expression. For details, see “2-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other A[...]

  • Page 116

    20060301 2-2-1 Basic Calculations 2-2 Ba s ic Calculation s This section explains how to perform basic mathematical operations in the Main application. Arithmetic Calculation s and P arenthe s e s Calculation s • You can perform arithmetic calculations by inputting expressions as they are written. All of the example calculations shown below are p[...]

  • Page 117

    20060301 2-2-2 Basic Calculations U s ing the , Key Use the , key to input exponential values. You can also input exponential values using the $ key on the  and  keyboards. Example s : 2.54 s 10 3 = 2540 ADC , B U 1600 s 10 –4 = 0.16 @E??$C U Omitting the Multiplication Sign You can omit the multiplication sign in any of the followi[...]

  • Page 118

    20060301 2-2-3 Basic Calculations Tip • The “ans” variable is a system variable. For details about system variables, see “1-7 Variables and Folders”. • Since “ans” is a variable name, you can specify the “ans” variable by inputting [a][n][s] on the  (alphabet) keyboard, or by tapping the # key on the  or the  keyboard. [...]

  • Page 119

    20060301 Calculation Err or An error message dialog box, like the one shown below, appears when there is a problem with the syntax of an input expression or value, when the number of decimal places of a calculation result in the Standard mode (page 2-2-6) exceeds a specified range, etc. Tap [OK] to close the dialog box and return to the calculation[...]

  • Page 120

    20060301 Calculation Priority Sequence Your ClassPad automatically performs calculations in the following sequence.  Commands with parentheses (sin(, diff(, etc.)  Factorials ( x ! ), degree specifications ( o , r ), percents (%)  Powers  P , memory, and variable multiplication operations that omit the multiplication sign (2 P , 5A, etc[...]

  • Page 121

    20060301 Calculation Mode s The Main application has a number of different modes, as described under “Using Main Application Modes” on page 2-1-4. The display format of calculation results depends on the currently selected Main application mode. This section tells you which mode you need to use for each type of calculation, and explains the dif[...]

  • Page 122

    20090601 S U s ing the t Button to T oggle between the Standard Mode and Decimal Mode You can tap t to toggle a displayed value between Standard mode and Decimal mode format. Note that tapping t toggles the format of a displayed value. It does not change the current Standard mode/Decimal mode setting. Example 1: Tapping t while the ClassPad is conf[...]

  • Page 123

    20090601 2-2-8 Basic Calculations ( ) P 4 ( ) P 4 S Example s of Complex mode and Real mode calculation re s ult s Expre ss ion Comple x Mode Real Mode solve ( x 3 – x 2 + x – 1 = 0, x ){ x = – i , x = i , x = 1} { x = 1} i + 2 i 3· i ERROR: Non-Real in Calc Tip • You can select “ i ” or “ j ” for the imaginary unit. See “Specify[...]

  • Page 124

    20060301 2-3 U s ing the Calculation Hi s tory The Main application work area calculation history can contain up to 30 expression/result pairs. You can look up a previous calculation, edit, and then re-calculate it, if you want. Viewing Calculation Hi s tory Content s Use the scroll bar or scroll buttons to scroll the work area window up and down. [...]

  • Page 125

    20060301 Re-calculating an Expre ss ion You can edit a calculation expression in the calculation history and then re-calculate the resulting expression. Tapping U re-calculates the expression where the cursor is currently located, and also re-calculates all of the expressions below the current cursor location. Example 1: To change the expression ?[...]

  • Page 126

    20060301 Example 2: To change from the Standard mode to the Decimal mode (page 2-2-6), and then re-calculate S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Move the cursor to the location from which you want to re-calculate. • In this example, we will tap the end of line 2 to locate the cursor there. (2) Tap “Standard” on the status bar to toggle it to “Deci[...]

  • Page 127

    20060301 Deleting P art of the Calculation Hi s tor y Content s You can use the following procedure to delete an individual two-line expression/result unit from the calculation history. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Move the cursor to the expression line or result line of the two-line unit you want to delete. (2) Tap [Edit] and then [Delete]. • Th[...]

  • Page 128

    20060301 2-4-1 Function Calculations 2-4 Function Calculation s This section explains how to perform function calculations in the Main application work area. • Most of the operators and functions described in this section are input from the  (math) and  (catalog) keyboard. The actual keyboard you should use to perform the sample operations [...]

  • Page 129

    20060301 I T rigonometric Function s ( s in, co s , tan) and In ver s e T rigonometric Function s ( s in –1 , c o s –1 , tan –1 ) The first four examples below use “Degree” (indicated by “Deg” in the status bar) as the angle unit setting. The final example uses “Radian” (indicated by “Rad”). For details about these settings, s[...]

  • Page 130

    20060301 I Logarithmic Function s (log, ln) and Exponential Function s ( e , ^, I ) Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D log1.23 (log 10 1.23) = 0.08990511144 G Func G J 1.23 U or 5 10 C 1.23 U ln90 (log e 90) = 4.49980967 G Func G ( 90 U or 5 L C C 90 U log 3 9 = 2 G Func G J 3  9 U or 5 3 C 9 U 10 1.23 = 16.9824[...]

  • Page 131

    20060301 I Hyperbolic Function s ( s inh, co s h, tanh) and In ver s e Hyperbolic Function s ( s inh –1 , c o s h –1 , tanh –1 ) Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D sinh3.6 = 18.28545536 TRIG Func   3.6 U cosh1.5 – sinh1.5 = 0.2231301601 TRIG Func   1.5   1.5 U e –1.5 = 0.2231301601* G MATH Func G[...]

  • Page 132

    20060301 I Other Function s (%, , x 2 , x –1 , x !, ab s , s ignum, int, frac, intg, fRound, s Round) Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D What is 12% of 1500? 180 SMBL Cmd 1500  12  U What percent of 880 is 660? 75% SMBL Cmd 660  880  U What value is 15% greater than 2500? 2875 SMBL Cmd 2500  1  15  Wh[...]

  • Page 133

    20090601 Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D What is the sign of –3.4567? –1 (signum returns –1 for a negative value, 1 for a positive value, “Undefined” for 0, and A ¦ A µ for an imaginary number.) Func [signum]  3.4567 U What is the integer part of –3.4567? –3 CALC Func  3.4567 U What is the decimal part[...]

  • Page 134

    20090601 S “rand” Function • The “rand” function generates random numbers. If you do not specify an argument, “rand” generates 10-digit decimal values 0 or greater and less than 1. Specifying two integer values for the argument generates random numbers between them. Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D Generate ran[...]

  • Page 135

    20090601 2-4-8 Function Calculations De s cription: • “ n ” must be a positive integer, and “ σ ” must be greater than 0. Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D Randomly produce a body length value obtained in accordance with the normal distribution of a group of infants less than one year old with a mean body length of[...]

  • Page 136

    20090601 S “RandSeed” Command • You can specify an integer from 0 to 9 for the argument of this command. 0 specifies non- sequential random number generation. An integer from 1 to 9 uses the specified value as a seed for specification of sequential random numbers. The initial default argument for this command is 0. • The numbers generated b[...]

  • Page 137

    20090601 Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D Determine the greatest common divisors of {4, 3}, {12, 6}, and {36, 9}. Func [iGcd] W 4  3 Y  W 12  6 Y  W 36  9 Y  U S “iLcm” Function Syntax: iLcm(Exp-1, Exp-2[, Exp-3…Exp-10)] (Exp-1 through Exp-10 all are integers.) iLcm(List-1, List-2[, List-3…List-10)][...]

  • Page 138

    20090601 Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D Divide 21 by 6 and 7, and determine the remainder of both operations. (iMod(21, {6, 7}) Func [iMod] 21  W 6  7 Y  U I P erm utation ( n P r ) and Combination ( n C r ) S T otal Number of P erm utation s S T otal Number of Combination s Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operati[...]

  • Page 139

    20090601 2-4-12 Function Calculations I Condition J udgment (judge , piecewi s e) S “judge” Function The “judge” function returns TRUE when an expression is true, and FALSE when it is false. Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D Is the following expression true or false? 1 = 1 TRUE Func [judge] 1  1 U Is the following[...]

  • Page 140

    20090601 I Angle Symbol (  ) Use this symbol to specify the coordinate format required by an angle in a vector. You can use this symbol for a vector only. Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D Convert the polar coordinates r = 2 , Q = P /4 to rectangular coordinates. [1, 1] OPTN Func Change the [Angle] setting to “Radian?[...]

  • Page 141

    20090601 2-4-14 Function Calculations I Equal Symbol s and Unequal Symbol s ( = , x , < , > , ,  ) You can use these symbols to perform a number of different basic calculations. Prob lem U s e thi s keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D To add 3 to both sides of x = 3. x + 3 = 6 G MATH Cmd  7  3  3 U Subtract 2 from both sides of[...]

  • Page 142

    20090601 2-4-15 Function Calculations I Solution s Supported by Cla ss P ad (TRUE, F ALSE, Undefined, No Solution, d , con s t, con s tn) Solution De s cription Example TRUE Output when a solution is true. judge (1 = 1) U FALSE Output when a solution is false. judge (1 < 0) U Undefined Output when a solution is undefined. 1/0 U No Solution Outpu[...]

  • Page 143

    20090601 I Dirac Delta Function “delta” is the Dirac Delta function. The delta function evaluates numerically as shown below. 0, x x 0 D ( x ) = { D ( x ), x = 0 Non-numeric expressions passed to the delta function are left unevaluated. The integral of a linear delta function is a Heaviside function. Syntax: delta( x ) x : variable or number Ex[...]

  • Page 144

    20090601 I Heavi s ide Unit Step Function “heaviside” is the command for the Heaviside function, which evaluates only to numeric expressions as shown below. 0, x < 0 H ( x ) =  , x = 0 1, x > 0 1 2 Any non-numeric expression passed to the Heaviside function will not be evaluated, and any numeric expression containing comple[...]

  • Page 145

    20090601 I Gamma Function The Gamma function is called “gamma” on the ClassPad.  +  0 t x –1 e – t dt  ( x )  = For an integer n the gamma is evaluated as shown below. ( n – 1) !, n > 0 ' ( n ) = { undefined , n  0 The gamma is defined for all real numbers excluding negative integers. It is also defined for all comp[...]

  • Page 146

    20060301 2-5-1 List Calculations 2-5 Li s t Calculation s This section explains how to input data using the Main application or Stat Editor, and how to perform basic list calculations. Inputting Li s t Data You can input list data from the work area or on the Stat Editor window. I Inputting Li s t Data from the W ork Area Example: To input the list[...]

  • Page 147

    20060301 I LIST V ariable Element Operation s You can recall the value of any element of a LIST variable. When the values {1, 2, 3} are assigned to “lista”, for example, you can recall the second value in the “lista”, when you need it. You can also assign a value to any element in a list. When the values {1, 2, 3} are assigned to “lista?[...]

  • Page 148

    20060301 U s ing a Li s t in a Calculation You can perform arithmetic operations between two lists, between a list and a numeric value, or between a list and an expression, equation, or inequality. 2-5-3 List Calculations I Li s t Calculation Err or s • When you perform an arithmetic operation between two lists, both of the lists need to have the[...]

  • Page 149

    20060301 2-5-4 List Calculations U s ing a Li s t to A ss ign Different V alue s to Multiple V ariable s Use the procedure in this section when you want to use a list to assign various different values to multiple variables. Sintaxi s : List with Numbers 2 List with Variables Example: Assign the values 10, 20, and 30, to variables x , y , and z res[...]

  • Page 150

    20060301 2-6 Matrix and V ector Calculation s This section explains how to create matrices in the Main application, and how to perform basic matrix calculations. Tip • Since a vector can be viewed as 1-row by n -column matrix or n -row by 1-column matrix, this section does not include explanations specifically about vectors. For more information [...]

  • Page 151

    20060301 I Matrix V ariable Element Operation s You can recall the value of any element of a MATRIX variable. When the data 1 2 3 4 is assigned to matrix “mat1”, for example, you can recall the element located at row 2, column 1. You can also assign a value to any element in a matrix. For example, you could assign the value “5” to the eleme[...]

  • Page 152

    20060301 I Inputting Matrix V alue s with the  Keyboar d The  ,  , and  keys of the  keyboard make matrix value input quick and easy. T o do thi s : T ap thi s 2D key: Create a new 1-row s 2-column matrix  Create a new 2-row s 1-column matrix  Create a new 2-row s 2-column matrix  Add a column to the currently displayed matr[...]

  • Page 153

    20060301 Tip • In step (1) of the above procedure, we added rows and columns as they became necessary. Another way to accomplish the same result would be to add rows and columns to create a blank matrix of the required dimensions, and then start data input. You could create a 2-row s 3-column matrix by tapping  ,  ,  , or  ,  . In [...]

  • Page 154

    20060301 (3) Tap  , and then input the values for the second matrix. 2-6-5 Matrix and V ector Calculations Example 3: To multiply the matrix 1 2 3 4 by 5 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Perform the key operation below in the Main application work area.  ::@A;:BC;;D (2) Tap U . (4) Tap U . Tip • Note that when adding or subtracting two [...]

  • Page 155

    20060301 2-6-6 Matrix and V ector Calculations I Rai s ing a Matrix to a Specific P ower Example: To raise 1 2 3 4 to the power of 3 Use the procedures described under “Matrix Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division” on page 2-6-4 to input the calculation. The following are the screens that would be produced by each input method. Ti[...]

  • Page 156

    20060301 2-7 Specifying a Number Ba s e While using the Main application, you can specify a default number base (binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal) or you can specify a number base for a particular integer value. You can also convert between number bases and perform bitwise operations using logical operators (not, and, or, xor). Note that while a[...]

  • Page 157

    20060301 • The following are the calculation ranges for each of the number bases. Binary Values: Positive: 0 x 01111111111111111111111111111111 Negative: 10000000000000000000000000000000 x 11111111111111111111111111111111 Octal Values: Positive: 0 x 17777777777 Negative: 20000000000 x 37777777777 Decimal Values: Positive: 0 x 2147483647 Negative:[...]

  • Page 158

    20060301 Selecting a Number Ba s e Specifying a default number base in the Main application will apply to the current line (expression/result pair), and to all subsequent lines until you change the default number base setting. Use the number toolbar’s base buttons to specify the number base. S To s elect the number ba s e f or the line where the [...]

  • Page 159

    20060301 • Whenever you input a value into a line for which a number base is specified, the input value is converted automatically to the specified number base. Performing the calculation 19+1 in a line for which Hex (Hexadecimal) is specified as the number base, both the 19 and 1 are interpreted as hexadecimal values, which produces the calculat[...]

  • Page 160

    20060301 Bitwi s e Operation s The logical operators listed below can be used in calculations. Operator De s cription and Returns the result of a bitwise product. or Returns the result of a bitwise sum. xor Returns the result of a bitwise exclusive logical sum. not Returns the result of a complement (bitwise inversion). Examples 1, 2, and 3 use Bin[...]

  • Page 161

    20060301 2-8-1 Using the Action Menu 2-8 U s ing the Action Menu The [Action] menu helps to make transformation and expansion functions, calculus functions, statistical functions, and other frequently used mathematical menu operations easier to use. Simply select the function you want, and then enter expressions or variables in accordance with the [...]

  • Page 162

    20060301 2-8-2 Using the Action Menu Example Screen s hot s The screenshots below show examples of how input and output expressions appear on the ClassPad display. In some cases, the input expression and output expression (result) may not fit in the display area. If this happens, tap the left or right arrows that appear on the display to scroll the[...]

  • Page 163

    20060301 20080201 Di s pla ying the Action Menu Tap [Action] on the menu bar to display the menu of 12 submenus shown below. 2-8-3 Using the Action Menu The following explains the functions that are available on each of these submenus. U s ing the T ran s formation Submen u The [Transformation] submenu contains commands for expression transformatio[...]

  • Page 164

    20060301 S s implify Function: Simplifies an expression. Syntax: simplify (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ x ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To simplify (15  3 + 26)^(1/3) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][simplify] Example: To simplify cos(2 x ) + (sin( x )) 2 (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [...]

  • Page 165

    20060301 2-8-5 Using the Action Menu S rF actor Function: Factors an expression up to its roots, if any. Syntax: rFactor (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ x ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To factor x 2 I 3 Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][rFactor] S factorOut Function: Factors out an expression [...]

  • Page 166

    20060301 2-8-6 Using the Action Menu S tExpand Function: Employs the sum and difference formulas to expand a trigonometric function. Syntax: tExpand(Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ x ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To expand sin (a + b) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][tExpand] S tCollect Functi[...]

  • Page 167

    20060301 2-8-7 Using the Action Menu S pr opFrac Function: Transforms a decimal value into its equivalent proper fraction value. Syntax: propFrac (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ x ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform 1.2 into its equivalent proper fraction value Menu Item: [Action][Transfo[...]

  • Page 168

    20060301 20080201 U s ing the Adv anced Submenu S s olve For information about solve, see page 2-8-43. S dSolve For information about dSolve, see page 2-8-44. S ta ylor Function: Finds a Taylor polynomial for an expression with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: taylor (Exp/List, variable, order [,center point] [ ) ] Example: To find a 5th ord[...]

  • Page 169

    20060301 ClassPad supports transform of the following functions. sin( x ), cos( x ), sinh( x ), cosh( x ), x n , x , e x , heaviside( x ), delta( x ), delta( x , n ) ClassPad does not support transform of the following functions. tan( x ), sin – 1 ( x ), cos – 1 ( x ), tan – 1 ( x ), tanh( x ), sinh – 1 ( x ), cosh – 1 ( x ), tanh – 1 ([...]

  • Page 170

    20060301 The values of a and b depend on the scientific discipline, which can be specified by the value of n (optional fourth parameter of Fourier and invFourier) as shown below. n (optional) ab Definition of the Fourier Integral Modern Physics 001   –  e   x  i  f ( x ) dx 2  2   Pure Math 11 – 1 Probability 21[...]

  • Page 171

    20060301 2-8-11 Using the Action Menu S FFT , IFFT Function: “ FFT ” is the command for the fast Fourier Transform, and “ IFFT ” is the command for the inverse fast Fourier Transform. 2 n data values are needed to perform FFT and IFFT. On the ClassPad, FFT and IFFT are calculated numerically. Syntax: FFT( list ) or FFT( list, m ) IFFT( list[...]

  • Page 172

    20060301 20080201 2-8-12 Using the Action Menu U s ing the Calculation Submenu The [Calculation] submenu contains calculus related commands, such as “diff” (differentiation) and “ ∫ ” (integration). Unfortunately, a number of conventions are in widespread use for a and b . For example, (0, 1) is used in modern physics, (1, –1) is used i[...]

  • Page 173

    20090601 2-8-13 Using the Action Menu S impDiff Function: Differentiates an equation or expression in implicit form with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: impDiff(Eq/Exp/List, independent variable, dependent variable) Example: To find y ’ using implicit differentiation Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][impDiff] Example: To find y ’ for a l[...]

  • Page 174

    20060301 2-8-14 Using the Action Menu S ° Function: Integrates an expression with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: ∫ (Exp/List[,variable] [ ) ] ∫ (Exp/List, variable, lower limit, upper limit [, tol ] [ ) ] • “ x ” is the default when you omit [,variable]. • “ tol ” represents the allowable error range. • This command retu[...]

  • Page 175

    20060301 2-8-15 Using the Action Menu S 3 Function: Evaluates an expression at discrete variable values within a range, and then calculates a sum. Syntax: 3 (Exp/List, variable, lower value, upper value [ ) ] Example: To calculate the sum of x 2 as the value of x changes from x = 1 through x =10. Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][ 3 ] S 0 Function: [...]

  • Page 176

    20060301 2-8-16 Using the Action Menu S normal Function: Returns the right side of the equation for the line normal ( y = ‘expression’) to the curve at the specified point. Syntax: normal (Exp/List, variable, variable value at point of normal [ ) ] Example: To determine the function of the line normal to y = x 3 at x = 2 Menu Item: [Action][Cal[...]

  • Page 177

    20060301 2-8-17 Using the Action Menu Example: To find the minimum point of x 2 – 1 with respect to x , when 2  x  3 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][fMin] Example: To find the minimum point of x 3 – 6 x with respect to x , when –2  x  2 and n = 1 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][fMin] S fMin Function: Returns the minimum point in[...]

  • Page 178

    20060301 2-8-18 Using the Action Menu S gcd Function: Returns the greatest common denominator of two expressions. Syntax: gcd (Exp/List-1, Exp/List-2 [ ) ] Example: To obtain the greatest common denominator of x + 1 and x 2 – 3 x – 4 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][gcd] S fMax Function: Returns the maximum point in a specific range of a functi[...]

  • Page 179

    20060301 20080201 2-8-19 Using the Action Menu S arg Function: Returns the argument of a complex number. Syntax: arg (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] Example: To obtain the argument of complex 2 + i (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Complex][arg] S lcm Function: Returns the least common multiple of two expressions. Syntax: lcm (Exp/List-1, Exp/List-2 [...]

  • Page 180

    20060301 2-8-20 Using the Action Menu S conjg Function: Returns the conjugate complex number. Syntax: conjg (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] • An inequality with the “ x ” (not equal to) relation symbol is also included (only in the Real mode). Example: To obtain the conjugate of complex number 1 + i Menu Item: [Action][Complex][conjg] S re Function: R[...]

  • Page 181

    20060301 20080201 2-8-21 Using the Action Menu S compT oP ol Function: Transforms a complex number into its polar form. Syntax: compToPol (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ p ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform 1 + i into its polar form (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Complex][compToPol][...]

  • Page 182

    20060301 2-8-22 Using the Action Menu S s eq Function: Generates a list in accordance with a numeric sequence expression. Syntax: seq (Exp, variable, start value, end value [,step size] [ ) ] Example: To generate a list in accordance with the expression x 2 + 2 x when the start value is 1, the end value is 5, and the step size is 2 Menu Item: [Acti[...]

  • Page 183

    20060301 S s ubLi s t Function: Extracts a specific section of a list into a new list. Syntax: subList (List [,start number] [,end number] [ ) ] Example: To extract the second through the fourth elements of the list {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][subList] • The leftmost element is the default when you omit “[,start number]”,[...]

  • Page 184

    20060301 20080201 2-8-24 Using the Action Menu S s or tD Function: Sorts the elements of the list into descending order. Syntax: sortD (List [ ) ] Example: To sort the elements of the list {1, 5, 3} into descending order Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][sortD] S li s tT oMat Function: Transforms lists into a matrix. Syntax: listToMat (List-1 [, Lis[...]

  • Page 185

    20060301 S min Function: Returns the minimum value of an expression or the elements in a list. Syntax: min (Exp/List-1[, Exp/List-2] [ ) ] Example: To determine the minimum values of the elements in list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][min] Example: To compare each element of list {1, 2, 3} with the value 2, and produce a list whose[...]

  • Page 186

    20060301 Example: To determine the mean of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3}, whose respective frequencies are {3, 2, 1} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][mean] S median Function: Returns the median of the elements in a list. Syntax: median (List-1[, List-2] [ ) ] • “List-2” specifies the frequency of each element in “List-1”. Exampl[...]

  • Page 187

    20060301 S Q 1 Function: Returns the first quartile of the elements in a list. Syntax: Q 1 (List-1[, List-2] [ ) ] • “List-2” specifies the frequency of each element in “List-1”. Example: To determine the first quartile of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][Q 1 ] Example: To determine the first [...]

  • Page 188

    20060301 S v ariance Function: Returns the sample variance of the elements in a list. Syntax: variance (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the sample variance of the elements in the list {1, 2, 4} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][variance] S dim Function: Returns the dimension of a list. Syntax: dim (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the dimensio[...]

  • Page 189

    20060301 2-8-29 Using the Action Menu S cuml Function: Returns the cumulative sums of the elements in a list. Syntax: cuml (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the cumulative sums of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][cuml] S li s t Function: Returns a list whose elements are the differences between two adjacent e[...]

  • Page 190

    20060301 2-8-30 Using the Action Menu S s equence Function: Returns the lowest-degree polynomial that represents the sequence expressed by the input list. When there are two lists, this command returns a polynomial that maps each element in the first list to its corresponding element in the second list. Syntax: sequence (List-1[, List-2] [,variable[...]

  • Page 191

    20060301 20080201 2-8-31 Using the Action Menu U s ing the Matrix-Create Submenu The [Matrix-Create] submenu contains commands related to creation of matrices. S trn Function: Returns a transposed matrix. Syntax: trn (Mat [ ) ] Example: To transpose the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Create][trn] S augment Function: Returns a mat[...]

  • Page 192

    20060301 2-8-32 Using the Action Menu S fill Function: Creates a matrix with a specific number of rows and columns, or replaces the elements of a matrix with a specific expression. Syntax: fill (Exp, number of rows, number of columns [ ) ] fill (Exp, Mat [ ) ] Example: To create a 2 s 3 matrix, all whose elements are 2 Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Cr[...]

  • Page 193

    20060301 20080201 S matT oLi s t Function: Transforms a specific column of a matrix into a list. Syntax: matToList (Mat, column number [ ) ] Example: To transform column 2 of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] into a list Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Create][matToList] U s ing the Matrix-Calculation Submenu The [Matrix-Calculation] submenu contains commands [...]

  • Page 194

    20060301 S norm Function: Returns the Frobenius norm of the matrix. Syntax: norm (Mat [ ) ] Example: To determine the norm of the matrix [[1, 2] [4, 5]] Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Calculation][norm] S rank Function: Finds the rank of matrix. The rank function computes the rank of a matrix by performing Gaussian elimination on the rows of the given [...]

  • Page 195

    20060301 2-8-35 Using the Action Menu S eigVc Function: Returns a matrix in which each column represents an eigenvector of a square matrix. • Since an eigenvector usually cannot be determined uniquely, it is standardized as follows to its norm, which is 1: When V = [ x 1, x 2, ..., xn ], ( ¸ x 1 ¸ 2 + ¸ x 2 ¸ 2 + .... + ¸ xn ¸ 2 ) = 1. Synt[...]

  • Page 196

    20060301 2-8-36 Using the Action Menu S QR Function: Returns the QR decomposition of a square matrix. Syntax: QR (Mat, qVariableMem, rVariableMem [ ) ] Example: To obtain the QR decomposition of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] • The unitary matrix is assigned to variable Q, while the upper triangular matrix is assigned to variable R. Menu Item: [Actio[...]

  • Page 197

    20060301 S mRowAd d Function: Multiplies the elements of a specific row in a matrix by a specific expression, and then adds the result to another row. Syntax: mRowAdd (Exp, Mat, row number-1, row number-2 [ ) ] Example: To multiply row 1 of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] by x , and then add the result to row 2 Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Calculation][mR[...]

  • Page 198

    20060301 20080201 2-8-38 Using the Action Menu S colNorm Function: Calculates the sums of the absolute values of the elements of each column of a matrix, and returns the maximum value of the sums. Syntax: colNorm (Mat [ ) ] Example: To calculate the sums of the absolute values of the elements in each column of the matrix [[1, –2, 3][4, –5, –6[...]

  • Page 199

    20060301 S augment Function: Returns an augmented vector [Mat-1 Mat-2]. Syntax: augment (Mat-1, Mat-2 [ ) ] Example: To augment vectors [1, 2] and [3, 4] Menu Item: [Action][Vector][augment] S fill Function: Creates a vector that contains a specific number of elements, or replaces the elements of a vector with a specific expression. Syntax: fill (E[...]

  • Page 200

    20060301 S angle Function: Returns the angle formed by two vectors. Syntax: angle (Mat-1, Mat-2 [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 s N or N s 1 matrix only. Example: To determine the angle formed by vectors [1, 2] and [3, 4] (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Vector][angle] S norm Function: Returns the norm of a vector. Syntax: norm [...]

  • Page 201

    20060301 S toRect Function: Returns an equivalent rectangular form [ x y ] or [ x y z ]. Syntax: toRect (Mat [,natural number] [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 s N or N s 1 matrix only (N = 2, 3). • This command returns “ x ” when “natural number” is 1, “ y ” when “natural number” is 2, and “ z ” when “natural num[...]

  • Page 202

    20060301 20080201 S toCyl Function: Returns an equivalent cylindrical form [ r  Q  z ]. Syntax: toCyl (Mat [,natural number] [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 s 3 or 3 s 1 matrix only. • This command returns “ r ” when “natural number” is 1, “ Q  ” when “natural number” is 2, and “ z ” when “natural number[...]

  • Page 203

    20090601 2-8-43 Using the Action Menu S s olve Function: Returns the solution of an equation or inequality. Syntax: solve(Exp/Eq/Ineq [,variable] [ ) ] • For this syntax, “Ineq” also includes the p operator. • “ x ” is the default when you omit “[,variable]”. solve(Exp/Eq,variable[, value, lower limit, upper limit] [ ) ] • This sy[...]

  • Page 204

    20090601 2-8-44 Using the Action Menu Note For the solution, the solve function returns an expression or value for the expression (Exp/Eq) input as its argument. The message “More solutions may exist” will appear on the display when a value is returned as the solution, because there may be multiple solutions. The solve function can return a max[...]

  • Page 205

    20090601 2-8-45 Using the Action Menu S exc hange Function: Swaps the right-side and left-side elements of an equation or inequality. Syntax: exchange(Eq/Ineq/List [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ x ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To swap the left-side and right-side elements of 3 > 5 x – 2 y Menu Item: [Action][Eq[...]

  • Page 206

    20090601 2-8-46 Using the Action Menu S getLeft Function: Extracts the left-side elements of an equation or inequality. Syntax: getLeft(Eq/Ineq/List [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ x ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To extract the left side elements of y = 2 x 2 + 3 x + 5 Menu Item: [Action][Equation/Inequality][getLeft[...]

  • Page 207

    20060301 20080201 2-8-47 Using the Action Menu U s ing the A ss i s tant Submenu The [Assistant] submenu contains two commands related to the Assistant mode. • Note that the following commands are valid in the Assistant mode only. For more information on the Assistant mode see “Assistant Mode and Algebra Mode” on page 2-2-8. S arrange Functio[...]

  • Page 208

    20090601 2-8-48 Using the Action Menu S Clear_a_z Function: Clears all single-character variable names (a-z and A-Z) in the current folder. U s ing the Di s trib ution and In v . Di s tribution Submenu s The [Distribution] and [Inv. Distribution] submenus include functions related to each type of statistical calculation distribution probability. No[...]

  • Page 209

    20090601 normPDf({1, 2},{1, 2}, 0) = {0.24, 0.12} normPDf({1, 2},{1, 2},{1, 0}) = {0.40, 0.12} The following explains how to specify list data in arguments and how calculation results are output. (a) Specifying list data for a single argument • Basically, you can specify any list you like, but the each of the elements in the list must be in accor[...]

  • Page 210

    20090601 S normCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability of a normal distribution between a lower bound and an upper bound. Syntax: normCDf(lower value, upper value[, S , M )] • When S and M are skipped, S = 1 and M = 0 are used. Example: To determine the normal probability density when lower bound value = − d , upper bound value = 36, S[...]

  • Page 211

    20090601 S tCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability of a Student- t distribution between a lower bound and an upper bound. Syntax: tCDf(lower value, upper value, df [ ) ] Example: To determine the Student- t distribution probability when lower value = 1.5, upper value = d , df = 18 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][tCDf] For more informati[...]

  • Page 212

    20090601 2-8-52 Using the Action Menu Menu Item: [Action][Inv. Distribution][invChiCDf] For more information, see “Inverse C 2 Cumulative Distribution” on page 7-11-10. S fPDf Function: Returns the F probability density for a specified value. Syntax: fPDf( x , n : df , d : df [ ) ] Example: To determine the F probability density when x = 1.5, n[...]

  • Page 213

    20090601 S binomialCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur between specified lower value and upper value. Syntax: binomialCDf(lower value, upper value, numtrial value, pos [ ) ] Example: To determine the binomial cumulative probability when lower value = 2, upper value = 5, numtrial va[...]

  • Page 214

    20090601 S poi ss onPDf Function: Returns the probability in a Poisson distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial. Syntax: poissonPDf( x , L [ ) ] Example: To determine the Poisson probability when x = 10, L = 6 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][poissonPDf] For more information, see “Poisson Distribution Probability” on page [...]

  • Page 215

    20090601 Example: To determine the minimum number of trials when pr ob = 0.8074, L = 2.26 Menu Item: [Action][Inv. Distribution][invPoissonCDf] For more information, see “Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution” on page 7-11-19. S geoPDf Function: Returns the probability in a geometric distribution that the success will occur on a specified tri[...]

  • Page 216

    20090601 The calculation results of invGeoCDf are integers. Accuracy may be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the displayed values. Example: To determine the minimum number of trials when pr ob = 0.875, po[...]

  • Page 217

    20090601 The calculation results of invHypergeoCDf are integers. Accuracy may be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the displayed values. Example: To determine the minimum number of trials when pr ob = 0.3,[...]

  • Page 218

    20060301 (3) Tap [Interactive], [Transformation], and then [factor]. • This factorizes the selected expression. 2-9 U s ing the Interactive Menu The [Interactive] menu includes most of the commands that are on the [Action] menu. Selecting a command on the [Action] menu will simply execute the command. With the [Interactive] menu, on the other han[...]

  • Page 219

    20060301 2-9-2 Using the Interactiv e Menu S T o factorize from the Action men u (1) Tap [Action], [Transformation], and then [factor]. • This inputs “factor(” into the work area. (2) Input the expression you want to factorize ( x 3 – 3 x 2 + 3 x – 1). (3) Tap U . • This factorizes the selected expression. [Interactive] menu operations [...]

  • Page 220

    20060301 (4) On the dialog box, tap “Definite integral” to select it. • This displays boxes for specifying the variable and the lower limit and the upper limit. 2-9-3 Using the Interactiv e Menu (5) Input the required data for each of the following three arguments. Variable: x Lower: 1 Upper: 2 (6) Tap [OK]. • This performs the calculation [...]

  • Page 221

    20060301 2-9-4 Using the Interactiv e Menu (3) Tap [Interactive] and then [apply]. • This executes the part of the calculation you selected in step (2). The part of the calculation that is not selected ( s cos( x ) + sin( x ) s diff(cos( x ), x )) is output to the display as-is. U s ing the “apply” Command The “apply” command is included [...]

  • Page 222

    20060301 2-10-1 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Graph 3D Graph Conics Graph Geometry Stat Editor Financial Numeric Solver Verify Graph Editor 3D Graph Editor Conics Editor Spreadsheet Differential Equation Editor Probability Sequence Editor (2) Tap the button that corresponds to the window you want to display. • [...]

  • Page 223

    20060301 2-10-2 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Clo s ing Another Application’ s Window S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap anywhere inside of the window you would like to close. (2) Tap the R button in the upper right corner, or tap and then [Close]. • The Main application work area expands to fill the entire disp[...]

  • Page 224

    20060301 2-10-3 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (3) Drag the stylus across “ x ^2 – 1” in the work area to select it. (4) Drag the selected expression to the Graph window. • This graphs y = x 2 – 1. This graph reveals that the x -intercepts are x = p 1. Tip • As can be seen in the above example, a graph[...]

  • Page 225

    20060301 2-10-4 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications U s ing a Graph Editor Window (Graph & T able:  , Conic s :  , 3D Graph: , Numeric Solver:  ) You can copy expressions by dragging them between the work area window and the Graph Editor, Conics Editor, 3D Graph Editor, and Numeric Solver windows. Example:[...]

  • Page 226

    20060301 2-10-5 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (4) Press  to register the expression. • The copied expression is displayed in natural format, with the check box next to it selected. • You could now tap  to graph the function. Tip • For more information about the Graph Editor window, see Chapter 3. For [...]

  • Page 227

    20060301 2-10-6 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the work area window, tap  to display the Stat Editor window in the lower window. (2) Input the following list data into the lists named “list1” and “list2”. list1 = {1, 2, 3} list2 = {4, 5, 6} (3) Make the work area window ac[...]

  • Page 228

    20060301 2-10-7 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (4) Tap the Stat Editor window to make it active. • Here you can see that list3 contains the result of list1 + list2. (5) Tap the work area window to make it active. (6) Perform the operation {12, 24, 36}  test, which assigns the list data {12, 24, 36} to the LIS[...]

  • Page 229

    20090601 (7) Tap the Stat Editor window to make it active. (8) Scroll the screen to the right until the blank list to the right of “list6” is visible. 2-10-8 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (9) Tap the blank cell next to “list6”, input “test”, and then tap U . • This displays the list data {12, 24, 36[...]

  • Page 230

    20060301 2-10-9 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications U s ing the Geometry Window  When there is a Geometry window on the display, you can drag values and expressions to the Geometry window to draw the graph or figure of the value or expression. You can also drag a figure from the Geometry window to the work area, whi[...]

  • Page 231

    20060301 2-10-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (5) Drag the stylus across x 2 + y 2 = 1 in the work area to select it. (6) Drag the selected expression to the Geometry window. • A circle appears in the Geometry window. Tip • The following table shows the types of expressions you can drop into the Geometry win[...]

  • Page 232

    20060301 2-10-11 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications I Drag ging a Figure from the Geometry Window to the W ork Area The following shows what happens when you drag a figure from the Geometry window to the work area. Dropping this into the w ork area: Displays this: Point Line Circle, Arc, Ellipse, Function, or Curve Li[...]

  • Page 233

    20090601 2-11-1 Using V er ify 2-11 U s ing V erify Verify provides you with a powerful tool to check whether your numeric or algebraic manipulations are correct. Verify will assist you in simplifying an expression by verifying whether or not the expression you entered is equivalent to your original expression. If it is, you will get a pleasant res[...]

  • Page 234

    20060301 V erify Menu s and Button s This section provides basic information about Verify menus, commands, and buttons. Tip • menu items are the same for all applications. For more information, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I File Menu T o do thi s : Select thi s File menu item: Discard the current window contents and create a new file [...]

  • Page 235

    20060301 2-11-3 Using V er ify I V erify Button s T o do thi s : T ap thi s V erify button: Clear the Verify window (same as the Clear All command)  Open or save a file (Main application only)  Specify the complex number calculation range for Verify  Specify the real number calculation range for Verify  Specify the positive real number [...]

  • Page 236

    20060301 2-11-4 Using V er ify (4) Following the equal sign (=), input 25 s 3 and tap U . (5) Tap [OK] to close the error dialog that appears. (6) Change 25 s 3 to 25 s 2 and tap U . (7) Following the next equal sign (=), input 5 s 5 s 2 and tap U . Example 2: To rewrite x 2 + 1 in factored form (1) Tap the left most toolbar icon  to begin a new[...]

  • Page 237

    20060301 2-12 U s ing Pr obability You can use Probability to simulate the following. • The die faces that will appear when a single die is thrown a specified number of times (1 Die) • The sum of the data of dice faces that will appear when a pair of dice is shown a specified number of times (2 Dice +) • The product of the data of dice faces [...]

  • Page 238

    20060301 Star ting Up Pr obability Use the following procedure to start up Probability. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. (2) On the icon palette that appears, tap  . • This will display an initial Probability dialog box like the one shown below. You can use this dialog box to try the probability emulati[...]

  • Page 239

    20060301 I Edit Menu T o do thi s : Select thi s Edit menu item: Copy the currently selected object (trial information or trial result) and place it onto the clipboard Copy Display the Probability dialog box and try the probability emulation (the trial result will be added to the end of the current file) Add Delete the currently selected trial data[...]

  • Page 240

    20060301 U s ing Pr obability The following examples show the basic steps for using Probability. Example 1: To obtain the sum data when a two six-sided die are thrown 50 times S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. (2) On the icon palette that appears, tap  . • This displays the Probability dialog box. (3) Ta[...]

  • Page 241

    20060301 Example 2: To obtain the product data when a two six-sided die are thrown 150 times (This example assumes you are continuing from Example 1.) (1) Tap 0 to display the Probability dialog box. (2) Tap the button next to “2 Dice > ” to select it. (3) Enter 150 into the “Number of trials” box. • Leave the value in the “Number of[...]

  • Page 242

    20060301 (3) Configure the following settings on the dialog box. • Replace: Yes (Indicates the ball is replaced before the next draw. If the ball is not replaced, select “No”.) • A: 10, B: 20, C: 30 (Leaver other letters set to zero.) • Number of trials: 50 (4) Tap [OK]. • The result will appear in the Probability window. 2-12-6 Using P[...]

  • Page 243

    20090601 Main application Program Program eActivity application 2-13 Running a Pr ogram in the Main Application You can run a program in the Main application or the eActivity application. Syntax: Folder nameProgram name(parameter) • You do not need to specify the folder name if the program you want to run is in the current folder. If you leave C[...]

  • Page 244

    20060301 (3) Enter 20 and then tap [OK]. • This will run OCTA and display the results in the program output window. (4) To close the program output window, tap anywhere inside it and then tap the R button in upper right corner. Program output window 2-13-2 Running a Program in the Main Application Example: To run the program named OCTA that we cr[...]

  • Page 245

    20060301 U s ing the Graph & T able Application The Graph & Table application allows you to input and graph rectangular coordinate equations (or inequalities), polar coordinate equations, and parametric expressions. After you graph an expression, you can zoom in or out, and move a pointer along the graph, displaying its coordinates as you g[...]

  • Page 246

    20060301 3-1 Graph & T ab le Application Over vie w This section describes the configuration of the Graph & Table application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Star ting Up the Graph & T able Application Use the following procedure to start up the Graph & Table application. S Cla ss P ad Operation [...]

  • Page 247

    20060301 You can also use a function on the Graph Editor window to generate a number table or a summary table. Number tables and summary tables are displayed in a Table window. Graph & T able Application Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the Graph & Table application menus and buttons. • For in[...]

  • Page 248

    20060301 T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s menu item: Input a rectangular coordinate type inequality J Type - y > Type L Type - y < Type  Type - y P Type 8 Type - y O Type Input an X inequality K Type - x > Type  Type - x < Type : Type - x P Type # Type - x O Type Input two functions in a list and shade between th[...]

  • Page 249

    20060301 I Graph Window Menu s and Button s T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s menu item: Cut the character string selected in the message box and place it onto the clipboard — Edit - Cut Copy the character string selected in the message box to the clipboard — Edit - Copy Paste the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor[...]

  • Page 250

    20060301 T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s menu item: Display the coordinates at a particular point on a graph  Analysis - Trace Insert a point, graphic, or text into an existing graph (page 3-6-1) — Analysis - Sketch Obtain the root ( x -intercept) of a graph 9 Analysis - G-Solve - Root Obtain the maximum value of a graph 5 A[...]

  • Page 251

    20060301 T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s menu item: Specify “AND Plot” as the inequality plot setting — ( - Inequality Plot - and Specify “OR Plot” as the inequality plot setting — ( - Inequality Plot - or Re-draw a graph — ( - ReDraw Make the Graph Editor window active  — Generate a number table for an existin[...]

  • Page 252

    20060301 3-1-7 Graph & T able Application Ov er view Graph & T able Application Statu s Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Graph & Table application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Graph & T able Application Ba s ic Operation s This section explains how to input a function on the [...]

  • Page 253

    20060301 Example 1: To input the function y = 3 x 2 on Sheet 1 and graph it S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap $ . • This starts the Graph & Table application. (2) In the Graph Editor window, tap the input box immediately to the right of line number y 1. • This locates the cursor in the input box for line y 1. 3-1-8 G[...]

  • Page 254

    20060301 3-1-9 Graph & T able Application Ov er view (4) Tap  . • This graphs the expression. The expression is displayed in the message box while the graph is being drawn. Tip • The Graph window message box is for both input and output. It displays information about the function and other information. You can also use it to edit the fun[...]

  • Page 255

    20060301 Example 2: To input the function r = 3sin2 into line 2 of Sheet 1 and graph it In Example 1, we graphed a rectangular expression in the form of y = f ( x ). You can also input polar coordinate expressions, inequalities, and other types of functions for graphing as well. In this example, we input and graph the polar coordinate expression r [...]

  • Page 256

    20060301 3-1-11 Graph & T able Application Ov er view (4) Tap  . • Since there are check marks next to both “ y 1” and “ r 2”, both expressions are graphed.[...]

  • Page 257

    20060301 3-2-1 Using the Graph Window 3-2 U s ing the Graph Windo w This section explains Graph window operations, including configuring display settings, scrolling, zooming the image, and more. Configuring View Windo w Parameter s for the Graph Window The View Window dialog box lets you specify the maximum and minimum values for each axis, the spa[...]

  • Page 258

    20060301 3-2-2 Using the Graph Window P olar Coordinate s and P arametric Coordinate s T o select this type of graph: x -log graph y -log graph xy -log graph Do this: Select the x -log check box. • This automatically sets “xdot” and “xscale” to “Auto”. Select the y -log check box. • This automatically sets “ydot” and “yscale?[...]

  • Page 259

    20060301 S View Window parameter precaution s • An error occurs if you input 0 for t θ step. • An error also occurs if you input a value that is out of range for a parameter, if you input a minus sign only, or if you perform any other illegal input. • An error occurs if ymin is greater than or equal to the ymax. The same is also true for the[...]

  • Page 260

    20060301 3-2-4 Using the Graph Window S To s tandar dize the View Windo w (1) On the application menu, tap $ . (2) Tap  . This displays the View Window dialog box. (3) Tap [Memory] and then [Standard]. This applies the standard View Window parameters shown below. xmin = – 10 xmax = 10 xscale = 1 xdot = 0.12987012987 ymin = – 10 ymax = 10 ysc[...]

  • Page 261

    20060301 3-2-5 Using the Graph Window S T o recall a s etup from Vie w Window memory (1) On the application menu, tap $ . (2) Tap  . This displays the View Window dialog box. (3) Tap [Memory] and then [Recall]. This displays a list of names of the View Window setups you have stored in memory. (4) Select the name of the setup you want, and then t[...]

  • Page 262

    20060301 3-2-6 Using the Graph Window P anning the Graph Window Placing the stylus against the Graph window and dragging causes the window to scroll automatically in the direction you drag. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap 4 . (3) Holding the stylus anywhere against the Graph window, drag it in the directi[...]

  • Page 263

    20060301 3-2-7 Using the Graph Window Zoom Command Description Bo x F actor Zoom In Zoom Out A uto Original Square Round Integer Pre vious Quick Initializ e Quick T rig Quick log ( x ) Quick e^ x Quick x ^2 Quick – x ^2 Quick Standard With “bo x zoom”, y ou dra w a selection boundar y around the area you would lik e to enlarge. This causes th[...]

  • Page 264

    20060301 3-2-8 Using the Graph Window S To u s e factor zoom Example: To enlarge the graphs of the following two expressions, by a factor of 5 in both directions, to determine whether they come into contact with each other y 1 = ( x + 4)( x + 1)( x – 3) y 2 = 3 x + 22 (1) On the application menu, tap $ . (2) On the Graph Editor window, input y 1 [...]

  • Page 265

    20060301 3-2-9 Using the Graph Window (6) Input 5 for both the x Factor and y Factor, and then tap [OK]. (7) Tap 4 , and then use the stylus to drag the screen image so the part you want to zoom is in the center of the screen. (8) Tap [Zoom] and then [Zoom In]. F actor Zoom Re s ult View Window Parameter V alues Command Quick Initializ e Quick T ri[...]

  • Page 266

    20060301 3-2-10 Using the Graph Window I U s ing Other Zoom Menu Command s The [Auto], [Original], [Square], [Round], [Integer], and [Previous] zoom commands are executed as soon as you tap one of them on the Graph window’s [Zoom] menu. For information about what each command does, see “Zoom Commands” on page 3-2-7. Tip • For auto zoom, yo[...]

  • Page 267

    20060301 I Redra wing a Graph Use the following procedure to redraw a graph when necessary. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap ( and then [ReDraw]. • While the Graph Editor window is active, you can redraw the graph by tapping  . Impor tant! • Use the ( - [ReDraw] command to redraw a graph that you dr[...]

  • Page 268

    20060301 3-3 Storing Function s Use the Graph Editor window to store a Graph & Table application function. This section covers Graph Editor operations, and explains how to store functions. U s ing Graph Editor Sheet s The Graph Editor window has five tabbed sheets named Sheet 1 through Sheet 5, each of which can contain up to 20 functions. You [...]

  • Page 269

    20060301 I Returning Sheet s to Their Default Name s The procedure below returns the sheet names to their initial default names (Sheet 1 through Sheet 5). S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the Graph Editor window to make it active. (2) Tap ( , [Sheet], and then [Default Name]. • This returns the currently active sheet to its default name. I Initial[...]

  • Page 270

    20060301 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap $ . (2) On the Graph Editor window, tap the down arrow next to “ y =”, or tap [Type]. (3) On the list that appears, tap the function type you want to select. Storing a Function This section presents a number of examples that illustrate how to store a Graph & Table application[...]

  • Page 271

    20060301 S To s tore an x = equation Example: To store x = 3 y in line x 4 (1) On the Graph Editor window, tap [Type] and then [ x =Type] to specify an x = equation. (2) Tap the box to the right of line number “ x 4”, and then input the equation: 8 . (3) Press  to store the equation. S To s tore an inequality Example: To store the inequal[...]

  • Page 272

    20060301 U s ing Built-in Function s Your ClassPad is pre-programmed with the commonly used functions listed below. You can recall a built-in function, save it to an Graph Editor sheet, assign values to its coefficients, and graph the results. y = a·x + b y = a·x^ 2 + b·x + c y = a·x^ 3 + b·x^ 2 + c·x + d y = a· sin ( b·x + c ) + d y = a· [...]

  • Page 273

    20060301 S To s ave an e xpre ss ion fr om the me ss age bo x to the Graph Editor window (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Perform a Trace operation (see “3-7 Using Trace”) or any other operation that causes the message box to appear. (3) Tap inside the message box to select the entire expression or drag the stylus across the part[...]

  • Page 274

    20060301 Deleting All Graph Editor Expre ss ion s Use the following procedure to delete all of the expressions on all Graph Editor sheets, and initialize all of the sheet names. (1) On the Graph Editor window, tap [Edit] and then [Clear All]. (2) In response to the confirmation dialog box that appears, tap [OK] to delete all expressions and initial[...]

  • Page 275

    20060301 I Specifying the Function Y ou W ant to Graph On the Graph Editor window, you can select one or more functions for graphing by selecting their check boxes. The functions whose check boxes are cleared are not graphed. • This check box is selected, so the function next to it will be graphed when you tap  . If you do not want to graph th[...]

  • Page 276

    20060301 I Quic k Graphing of an Expre ss ion U s ing Drag and Dr op You can use the following procedure to graph a single function, even when you have multiple functions selected on the Graph Editor window. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the tab of the sheet that contains the function you want to graph to make it active. (2) Drag the function you[...]

  • Page 277

    20060301 3-3-10 Storing Functions (3) Tap  . AND Plot OR Plot[...]

  • Page 278

    20060301 I Shading the Region Bounded b y T w o Expre ss ion s You can shade the region bounded by two expressions by specifying [ShadeType] as the function type and then inputting the expressions in the syntax shown below. Syntax: y ( {lower function f ( x ), upper function g ( x )} | A < x < B The value of B must be greater than A. • A &l[...]

  • Page 279

    20060301 3-3-12 Storing Functions I U s ing the Draw Shade Dialog Bo x to Shade the Region Bounded by T w o Expre ss ion s In this case, you input the expressions on a Draw Shade dialog box instead of the Graph Editor Window. Example: To graph f ( x ) = –1, g ( x ) = 1, –1 < x < 1 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the ( menu, tap [Draw Shade[...]

  • Page 280

    20060301 I Dr opping an Expre ss ion fr om the Main Application W ork Area into the Graph Window • You can graph a polar coordinate expression by dragging it from the Main Application work area and dropping it into the Graph window. • If there are multiple expressions in the same Main Application work area line, all of the expressions will be g[...]

  • Page 281

    20060301 Saving Graph Editor Data to Graph Memory Graph memory lets you store all of the expressions and their related information to a file for later recall. Each graph memory file contains the following data: • Functions on all five Graph Editor sheets (up to 100 functions) • Whether the check box next to each function is selected (checked) o[...]

  • Page 282

    20060301 3-4-1 Using T able & Graph For details about using the Stat Editor, see Chapter 7. 3-4 U s ing T ab le & Graph The Graph & Table application includes a “Table window” for displaying number tables and summary tables generated with the functions you input on the Graph Editor window. Generating a Number T able You can use eith[...]

  • Page 283

    20060301 S T o generate a number table b y s pecifying a range of value s f or x u s ing the T able Input dialog bo x Example: To generate a number table for the function y = 3 x 2 – 2 as the value of x changes from –3 to 1 in increments of 1 (1) On the application menu, tap $ . (2) In line y 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save y = 3 x[...]

  • Page 284

    20060301 S T o generate a number table b y a ss igning li s t v alue s to x (1) Create and save the list of values to be assigned. list1 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (2) In line y 1 of the Graph & Table application Graph Editor window, input and save y = 3 x 2 – 2. (3) Specify the list that contains the values you want to assign to x (list1 in this exampl[...]

  • Page 285

    20060301 I T able Generation Precaution s • Table generation is performed using the currently selected function that is of the current function type selected on the Graph Editor window toolbar. • Though the selected current function type is “ y =” in the above screenshot, there is no “ y =” type function selected on the Graph Editor win[...]

  • Page 286

    20060301 3-4-5 Using T able & Graph Tip • An error message appears and the number table contents are not changed if you enter an illegal value for x (such as 6 w 0). • The data in a “Y” column (Y1, Y2, etc.) of a table cannot be modified. Deleting, In s er ting, and Adding Number T able Line s You can use the following procedures to del[...]

  • Page 287

    20060301 3-4-6 Using T able & Graph S T o add a n umber table line (1) Tap the x -value of the bottom line of the number table. (2) Tap [T-Fact] and then [Add]. • After adding a new line, you can edit the x -value, if you want. For more information, see “Editing Number Table Values” on page 3-4-4. • You can add a line anywhere. When you[...]

  • Page 288

    20060301 Generating a Number T able and U s ing It to Draw a Graph After using a function to generate a number table, you can use the number table values to draw a graph. You can use number table values to draw two different types of graphs: a “connect type graph” on which points are connected by lines, or a “plot type graph” on which point[...]

  • Page 289

    20060301 (6) Specify the graph type. • To specify a connect type graph, tap [Graph] and then [G-Connect], or tap  . To specify a plot type graph, tap [Graph] and then [G-Plot], or tap . • This draws the graph on the Graph window. Saving a Number T able to a Li s t You can use the following procedure to save a particular column of a number ta[...]

  • Page 290

    20060301 (2) Tap ( and then [Table to List]. • This displays a dialog box for specifying a variable name. 3-4-9 Using T able & Graph (3) Enter the name you want to give to the variable, and then tap [OK]. • This assigns the list of data you selected to a variable with the name you specified. • If the variable name you input has not been u[...]

  • Page 291

    20060301 S Specifying all x -v alue s This method generates a reference table by looking up data stored in a list. A LIST variable is used to specify the x -values. When using this method, it is up to you specify all of the correct x -values required to generate the summary table. The summary table will not be generated correctly if you provide inc[...]

  • Page 292

    20060301 (4) Tap [Memory] and then [Auto]. • This causes all settings on the View Window dialog box to change to “Auto”. 3-4-11 Using T able & Graph (5) Tap the [OK] button to close the View Window dialog box. (6) Tap 5 to toggle to toolbar 2 and then tap  . • This starts summary table generation, and displays the result on the Table[...]

  • Page 293

    20060301 • Tapping  here graphs the function using the View Window settings automatically configured for summary table generation. 3-4-12 Using T able & Graph Impor tant! • A monotone increasing function or other special function may not be solvable by the ClassPad’s internal summary table calculation. If this happens, use the procedur[...]

  • Page 294

    20060301 • For this example, we will specify xmin = –0.5 and xmax = 2. (5) Tap the [OK] button to close the View Window dialog box. (6) Tap  . • This starts the summary table generation using the range you specified in step (4), and displays the result on the Table window. (3) Tap  to display the View Window dialog box. (4) Specify the [...]

  • Page 295

    20060301 I Generating a Summary T able b y Specifying All of the V alue s f or x In both of the previous examples, summary table generation is performed using View Window settings to calculate values for x that satisfy the function f  ( x ) = 0. With this table generation method, x -values are not calculated automatically. It is up to you to use[...]

  • Page 296

    20060301 (5) Tap the Graph Editor window to make it active. (6) Tap  . • This starts summary table generation using the x -values you input in step (4), and displays the result on the Table window. 3-4-15 Using T able & Graph Impor tant! • For the above method to correctly generate a summary table, you must have legal x -values in the li[...]

  • Page 297

    20060301 3-5 Modifying a Graph A graph can be modified in real time as you change its coefficients and/or the variables. The Graph & Table application provides you with two methods for modifying a graph. Direct Modify “Direct Modify” changes the coefficient in the equation of the original graph. This method can be used when you are modifyin[...]

  • Page 298

    20060301 3-5-2 Modifying a Graph T o do this: T ap the right graph controller arro w . T ap the left graph controller arro w . Do this: Decrease the v alue of the coefficient Increase the v alue of the coefficient • You can use the Dynamic Graph dialog box on page 3-5-4 to change the increment, if you want. (6) Input the amount of change (step) i[...]

  • Page 299

    20060301 (9) To modify the y 2 graph (2 x + 1), tap the down graph controller arrow to make it the graph active. • You can use the up and down cursor keys or graph controller arrows to switch between the two graphs, as required. • Repeat steps (7) and (8) to modify the currently selected graph. Tap . Tap . 3-5-3 Modifying a Graph (10) To quit g[...]

  • Page 300

    20060301 Sim ultaneou s ly Modifying Multiple Graph s b y Changing Common V ariable s (Dynamic Modify) Use the procedure below to change the values of up to two common variables used in multiple functions to simultaneously modify the graphs. S T o modify m ultiple graph s s imultaneou s ly Example: To graph the functions y = a x 2 – b and y = a x[...]

  • Page 301

    20060301 (10) Tap [OK]. • This displays a WARNING! dialog box for overwriting variable a . 3-5-5 Modifying a Graph • This graphs the functions using the a and b variable start values you specified on the Dynamic Graph dialog box, and displays “Modify” on the Graph window. … … … … E E E E (13) Modify the graphs by changing the value [...]

  • Page 302

    20060301 3-5-6 Modifying a Graph with the settings you configure on the Dynamic Graph dialog box. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Perform steps (1) through (9) under “To modify multiple graphs simultaneously” on page 3-5-4. (2) On the Dynamic Graph dialog box, tap the [Auto] option. I Cyc ling Through Graph Change s A utomatically Use the following[...]

  • Page 303

    20060301 Clear figures and te xt you ha v e added using the sketch f eature Plot a point on the Graph windo w Dra w a line on the Graph window Write text on the Graph windo w Dra w a line that is tangent to a par ticular point on a graph Dra w a line that is nor mal to a par ticular point on a graph Dra w a circle Dra w a vertical line Dra w a hori[...]

  • Page 304

    20060301 3-6-2 Using the Sketch Men u S T o draw a line on the Graph windo w (1) While the Graph window is active, tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Line]. (2) On the Graph window, tap the start point of the line and then tap the end point. This causes a straight line to be drawn between the two points. The message box shows the equation of the l[...]

  • Page 305

    20060301 S T o draw a line tangent to a graph Example: To draw a line tangent to the graph y = x 2 – x – 2 when x = 1 (1) In line y 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save y = x 2 – x – 2. (2) Tap  to graph the function. (3) Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Tangent]. • This displays the crosshair pointer along with its correspo[...]

  • Page 306

    20060301 S T o graph the in ver s e of a function Example: To graph y = x 2 – x – 2 and then overlay it with x = y 2 – y – 2 (1) In line y 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save y = x 2 – x – 2. (2) Tap  to graph the function. (3) Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Inverse]. • This graphs the inverse function. The message bo[...]

  • Page 307

    20060301 S T o draw a vertical or horizontal line Example: To draw a vertical line at x = 2 (1) While the Graph window is active, tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Vertical]. • This displays “Vertical” on the Graph window, and the ClassPad waits for you to draw the vertical line. (2) Press  . • This displays a dialog box for specifying[...]

  • Page 308

    20060301 3-7 U s ing T race Trace lets you move a point along a graph and displays the coordinates for the current pointer location. You can also link the trace operation to the number table used to draw a graph, so the pointer jumps to the coordinates that are currently selected in the table. U s ing T race to Read Graph Coordinate s Starting the [...]

  • Page 309

    20060301 • You can also move the pointer to a particular point by inputting coordinates. Pressing a number key displays a dialog box for inputting coordinates. Input the values you want and then tap [OK]. • When there are multiple graphs on the Graph window, you can use the up and down cursor keys or the up and down graph controller arrows to m[...]

  • Page 310

    20060301 Linking T race to a Number T able This section explains how you can link the movement of the trace pointer to the values in the number table used to draw the graph. This type of operation is called “linked trace”. • For information about generating a number table and performing other table operations, see “3-4 Using Table & Gra[...]

  • Page 311

    20060301 Generating Number T able V alue s fr om a Graph A “graph-to-table” feature lets you extract the coordinate values at the current pointer location and input them into a table. Example: Generate a table and graph for the expression y = x 3 – 3 x , and input the coordinates for specific points on the graph into a table Use the initial V[...]

  • Page 312

    20060301 (4) Tap the Graph window to make it active. Next, tap [Analysis] and then [Trace]. • This causes a pointer to appear on the graph. (5) Use the cursor key to move the pointer along the graph until it reaches a point whose coordinates you want to input into the table. (6) Press  to input the coordinates at the current cursor position at[...]

  • Page 313

    20060301 3-8 Analyzing a Function U s ed to Dra w a Graph Your ClassPad includes a G-Solve feature that lets you perform a variety of different analytical processes on an existing graph. G-Solve Menu Overview To access the [G-Solve] menu, tap [Analysis] and then [G-Solve]. The following describes the commands that are available on the [G-Solve] men[...]

  • Page 314

    20060301 U s ing G-Solve Menu Command s This section describes how to use each of the commands on the [G-Solve] menu. Note that all of the procedures in this section are performed in the Graph & Table application, which you can enter by tapping the $ icon on the application menu. S T o obtain the root of a function Example: To graph the functio[...]

  • Page 315

    20060301 S T o obtain the minim um value, maximum v alue, f Max, f Min, y -intercept, and inflection of a function Example: To graph the function y = x 2 ( x + 2)( x – 2) and obtain its minimum value (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –7.7, xmax = 7.7, xscale = 1 ymin = –3.8, ym[...]

  • Page 316

    20060301 S T o obtain the point of inter s ection f or tw o graph s Example: To graph the functions y = x + 1 and y = x 2 , and determine their point of intersection (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –5, xmax = 5, xscale = 1 ymin = –5, ymax = 5, yscale = 2 (2) On the Graph Editor[...]

  • Page 317

    20060301 S T o determine coordinate s at a particular point on a graph Example: To graph the function y = x ( x + 2)( x – 2) and determine the y -coordinate when x = 0.5, and the x -coordinate when y = 2.2 (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –7.7, xmax = 7.7, xscale = 1 ymin = –3[...]

  • Page 318

    20060301 S T o determine the definite integral for a particular domain Example: To graph the function y = x ( x + 2)( x – 2) and obtain its definite integral in the domain of 1  x  2 (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –7.7, xmax = 7.7, xscale = 1 ymin = –4, ymax = 4, yscal[...]

  • Page 319

    20060301 S T o determine the di s tance between any tw o point s (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap [Analysis], [G-Solve], and then [Distance]. • This displays “Distance” on the Graph window, and the ClassPad waits for you to specify the first point. (3) Tap the first point on the Graph window. • This causes a pointer to ap[...]

  • Page 320

    20060301 3-8-8 Analyzing a Function Used to Dra w a Graph (2) On the Graph Editor window, input and store y 1 = x 3 – 1 into line y 1, and then tap  to graph it. • Make sure that only “ y 1” is selected (checked). (3) Tap [Analysis], [G-Solve], and then [Inflection]. • This causes “Inflection” to appear on the Graph window, with a [...]

  • Page 321

    20060301 (4) Press  . • This displays a dialog box for inputting an interval of values for x , with 1 specified for the lower limit of the x -axis (Lower). (5) Tap the [Upper] input box and then input 2 for the upper limit of the x -axis. (6) Tap [OK]. • This causes a silhouette of the solid of revolution to appear on the Graph window, and i[...]

  • Page 322

    20060301 U s ing the Conic s Application The Conics application provides you with the capability to graph circular, parabolic, elliptic, and hyperbolic functions. You can also use the Conics application to quickly and easily determine the proper focal point, vertex, directrix, axis of symmetry, latus rectum, center, radius, asymptote, eccentricity,[...]

  • Page 323

    20060301 4-1 Conic s Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Conics application windows, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. • The Conics application uses many of the same commands (Zoom, Trace, Sketch, etc.) as the Graph & Table application. It is recommended that you familiarize yourself[...]

  • Page 324

    20060301 4-1-2 Conics Application Ov er view Conic s Application Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Conics application window. • For information about the menu, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I Conic s Editor Window Men u s and Button s The following describes the m[...]

  • Page 325

    20060301 Zoom - Square — Zoom - Round Zoom - Integer — Zoom - Previous Zoom - Quick Initialize — Zoom - Quick Trig Zoom - Quick log( x ) — Zoom - Quick e^ x Zoom - Quick x ^2 — Zoom - Quick – x ^2 — — — — — — = Analysis - Trace — Analysis - Sketch — Analysis - G-Solve Insert a point, graphic, or text into an existing gra[...]

  • Page 326

    20060301 — a - Store Picture — a - Recall Picture a - ReDraw " O - View Window O - Variable Manager * O - Conics Editor 6 — T — Display the View Window dialog box (page 3-2-1) to configure Graph window settings Activate the pan function for dragging the Graph window with the stylus Save a graph as image data (page 3-2-10) Recall the im[...]

  • Page 327

    20060301 4-2-1 Inputting Equations 4-2 Inputting Equation s This section explains the various ways you can input equations using the Conics Editor window. U s ing a Conic s Form to Input an Equation Preset formats can help you input conics equations quickly and easily. The following table contains a complete list of the types of equations that you [...]

  • Page 328

    20060301 4-2-2 Inputting Equations S T o input an equation u s ing a Conic s Form Example: To use a Conics Form to input the equation for a parabola with a horizontal axis (principal axis parallel with x -axis) (1) On the application menu, tap  to start the Conics application. (2) On the Conics Editor window, tap p , or tap [Form] and then [Inse[...]

  • Page 329

    20060301 4-2-3 Inputting Equations Inputting an Equation Manuall y To input an equation manually, make the Conics Editor window active, and then use the soft keyboard for input. T ran s forming a Manuall y Input Equation to a Conic s Form After you manually input an equation on the Conics Editor window, you can use the procedure below to transform [...]

  • Page 330

    20060301 4-3-1 Dra wing a Conics Graph 4-3 Drawing a Conic s Graph This section provides examples that show how to draw various types of conics graphs. Drawing a P arabola A parabola can be drawn with either a horizontal or vertical orientation. The parabola type is determined by the direction of its principal axis. I Drawing a P arabola that Open [...]

  • Page 331

    20060301 4-3-2 Dra wing a Conics Graph Example 2: To draw the parabola x = y 2 + 2 y + 3 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In step (2) of the above procedure, select “X = AY 2 + BY + C” on the Select Conics Form dialog box. (2) In step (3) of the above procedure, change the coefficients of the equation as follows: A = 1, B = 2, C = 3.[...]

  • Page 332

    20060301 I Drawing a P arabola that Open s V er tically A parabola with a vertical axis is one whose principal axis is parallel to the y -axis. There are two possible equations for a parabola with a vertical axis: y = A( x – H) 2 + K and y = A x 2 + B x +C. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Parabola that [...]

  • Page 333

    20060301 4-3-4 Dra wing a Conics Graph Drawing a Cir cle There are two forms that you can use to draw a circle. One form is the standard form, which allows you to specify the center point and radius. The other form is the general form, which allows you to specify the coefficients of each term. I Drawing a Cir cle b y Specifying a Center P oint and [...]

  • Page 334

    20060301 I Drawing a Cir cle b y Specifying the Coefficient s of a General Equation Example: To draw the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x – 6 y + 9 = 0 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Circle by Specifying a Center Point and Radius”, select “AX 2 + AY 2 + BX + CY + D = 0”. (2) Substitute the following values[...]

  • Page 335

    20060301 4-3-6 Dra wing a Conics Graph Drawing a Hyperbola A hyperbola can be drawn with either a horizontal or vertical orientation. The hyperbola type is determined by the direction of its principal axis. I Drawing a Hyperbola that Open s Horizontall y The standard form of a hyperbola with a horizontal axis is: Example: To draw the hyperbola with[...]

  • Page 336

    20060301 4-3-7 Dra wing a Conics Graph I Drawing a Hyperbola that Open s V er tically The standard form of a hyperbola with a vertical axis is: S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens Horizontally”, select “ ”. (2) Specify values for the coefficients. ( y – K) 2 – ( x – H) 2 = 1.[...]

  • Page 337

    20060301 4-3-8 Dra wing a Conics Graph Drawing a General Conic s Using the conics general equation A x 2 + B xy + C y 2 + D x + E y + F = 0, you can draw a parabola or hyperbola whose principal axis is not parallel either to the x -axis or the y -axis, a slanted ellipse, etc. Example: To draw x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 – 6 x + 6 y + 4 = 0 S Cla ss P ad Ope[...]

  • Page 338

    20060301 4-4-1 Using T race to Read Graph Coordinates 4-4 U s ing T race to Read Graph Coor dinate s Trace allows you move a pointer along a graph line and display the coordinates at the current pointer location. Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer ( ) to appear on the graph. You can then press the cursor key or tap the graph co[...]

  • Page 339

    20060301 4-5-1 Using G-Solv e to Analyze a Conics Graph 4-5 U s ing G-Solve to Anal yz e a Conic s Graph The G-Solve menu includes commands that let you perform a variety of different analytical processes on a graph drawn on the Conics Graph window. Di s pla ying the G-Solve Menu While there is a graph on the Conics Graph window, tap [Analysis] and[...]

  • Page 340

    20060301 4-5-2 Using G-Solv e to Analyze a Conics Graph U s ing G-Solve Menu Command s The following are some examples of how to perform the Conics application [G-Solve] menu commands. S T o determine the f ocu s of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 (1) On the Conics Editor window, input the conics equation and then tap > to graph it. • Her[...]

  • Page 341

    20060301 4-5-3 Using G-Solv e to Analyze a Conics Graph S T o determine the directrix of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Directrix] S T o determine the axi s of s ymmetry of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Symmetry] S T o determine the latu s rectum of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – [...]

  • Page 342

    20060301 S T o determine the a s ymptote s of the h yperbola [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Asymptotes] S T o determine the eccentricity of the ellip s e [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Eccentricity] S T o determine the x -inter cept of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [ x -Intercept] Tip • When there are two x -intercepts, pres[...]

  • Page 343

    20060301 S For the h yperbola , determine the x -coor dinate when the y -coor dinate i s 0 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [ x -Cal] Tip • When there are two x -coordinates, press the left and right cursor keys or tap the left and right graph controller arrows to toggle the display between them. S For the h yperbola , determine the y -coor dinate when t[...]

  • Page 344

    20060301 U s ing the 3D Graph Application The 3D Graph application lets you draw a 3-dimensional graph of an equation in the form z = f ( x , y ) or of a parametric equation. 5-1 3D Graph Application Overview 5-2 Inputting an Expre ss ion 5-3 Drawing a 3D Graph 5-4 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Function [...]

  • Page 345

    20060301 5-1 3D Graph Application Over vie w This section describes the configuration of the 3D Graph application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. 5-1-1 3D Graph Application Ov er view 3D Graph Application Window The 3D Graph application has a 3D Graph Editor window and a 3D Graph window. Both of these windows ap[...]

  • Page 346

    20060301 5-1-2 3D Graph Application Ov er view 3D Graph Application Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the 3D Graph application’s windows. • For information about the menu, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I 3D Graph Editor Window Men u s and Button s The following desc[...]

  • Page 347

    20060301 5-1-3 3D Graph Application Ov er view I 3D Graph Window Men u s and Button s The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform while the 3D Graph window is active. T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: W Zoom - Zoom In E Zoom - Zoom Out — Zoom - View- x — Zoom - View- y — Zoom - View- z — Zoo[...]

  • Page 348

    20060301 3D Graph Application Statu s Bar The status bar at the bottom of the 3D Graph application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Rad Deg Gra Real The angle unit setting is radians . The angle unit setting is degrees . The angle unit setting is grads . Cplx The Comple x (comple x number calculation) [...]

  • Page 349

    20060301 5-2-1 Inputting an Expression 5-2 Inputting an Expre ss ion Use the 3D Graph Editor window to input 3D Graph application expressions. U s ing 3D Graph Editor Sheet s The 3D Graph Editor has five tabbed sheets named Sheet 1 through Sheet 5. Each sheet can contain up to 20 functions. This means you can have up to 100 functions stored in the [...]

  • Page 350

    20060301 5-2-2 Inputting an Expression Storing a Function You can input an equation of the form z = f ( x , y ) or a parametric equation. Example: To store z = x 2 + y 2 in line z 1 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap  . • This starts up the 3D Graph application and displays the initial screen of the active 3D Graph Editor[...]

  • Page 351

    20060301 5-3-1 Dra wing a 3D Graph 5-3 Drawing a 3D Graph This section explains how to draw a 3D graph, as well as how to change the angle of a graph and how to rotate a graph. Configuring 3D Graph View Window P arameter s Use the 3D Graph View Window to specify maximum and minimum values for the x -axis, y -axis, z -axis, s -variable, and t -varia[...]

  • Page 352

    20060301 5-3-2 Dra wing a 3D Graph • The following are the allowable ranges for the indicated View Window parameters: xgrid and ygrid: 2 to 50; angle Q  : – 180 < Q  180; angle F : 0 to 360. • The angle parameters, Q and F  are always degrees, regardless of the current [Angle] setting of the Basic Format dialog box (page 1-9-5). ([...]

  • Page 353

    20060301 3D Graph Example Example 1: To graph the hyperbolic paraboloid z = x 2 /2 – y 2 /8. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In the 3D Graph application, make the 3D Graph Editor window active. (2) Tap  to display the View Window dialog box, and then configure the parameters shown below. xmin = –3 xmax = 3 xgrid = 25 ymin = –3 ymax = 3 ygrid =[...]

  • Page 354

    20060301 Example 2: To graph a parametric equation S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In the 3D Graph application, make the 3D Graph Editor window active. (2) Tap to specify input of a parametric equation. (3) Tap line Xst1, and then input sin( t ) × cos( s ).  ;. 3 Q R  A Q  (4) Press  . (5) In line Yst1 input cos( t ) × cos( s ). [...]

  • Page 355

    20060301 5-3-5 Dra wing a 3D Graph I Selecting the Function to be Graphed The 3D Graph application lets you graph only one function at a time. When you have more than one expression input on the 3D Graph Editor window, you need to select the one you want to graph. Tapping the “ ” button next to a function changes the button to “ ”, which in[...]

  • Page 356

    20060301 5-4-1 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window 5-4 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Windo w This section describes how to enlarge and reduce the size of a graph, how to change the eye position to view the graph along a particular axis, and how to perform other operations like automatic rotation. Impor tant! • All of the operations[...]

  • Page 357

    20060301 5-4-2 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window • To view the graph facing the y -axis, tap [Zoom] and then [View- y ], or press the 8 key. • To view the graph facing the z -axis, tap [Zoom] and then [View- z ], or press the ' key. Rotating the Graph Manuall y Use the procedures described below to rotate the displayed graph manu[...]

  • Page 358

    20060301 5-4-3 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window Rotating a Graph A utomaticall y You can use the following procedure to rotate a graph automatically for about 30 seconds. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) To start automatic graph rotation, tap ( and then [Rotating]. (2) On the submenu that appears, select the rotation direction you want: [Lef[...]

  • Page 359

    20060301 5-5-1 Other 3D Graph Application Functions 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Function s U s ing T race to Read Graph Coordinate s Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer to appear on the graph. You can then press a cursor key or tap the graph controller arrows to move the pointer to the location you want, and read the coordina[...]

  • Page 360

    20060301 5-5-2 Other 3D Graph Application Functions Calculating a z -v alue for P ar ticular x - and y -v alue s , or s - and t -value s Use the following procedure to calculate a z -value for given x - and y -values on the displayed graph. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Draw the graph and make the 3D Graph window active. (2) Tap [Analysis], and then[...]

  • Page 361

    20060301 U s ing Drag and Dr op to Dra w a 3D Graph Dropping an equation of the form z = f ( x , y ) into the 3D Graph window will graph the equation. 5-5-3 Other 3D Graph Application Functions[...]

  • Page 362

    20060301 6 U s ing the Sequence Application The Sequence application provides you with the tools you need to work with explicit sequences and recursive type sequences. 6-1 Sequence Application Over view 6-2 Inputting an Expre ss ion in the Sequence Application 6-3 Recur s ive and Explicit Form of a Sequence 6-4 U s ing LinkT race 6-5 Drawing a Cobw[...]

  • Page 363

    20060301 6-1-1 Sequence Application Ov er view 6-1 Sequence Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Sequence application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Star ting up the Sequence Application Use the following procedure to start up the Sequence application. S Cla ss P ad Operation On [...]

  • Page 364

    20060301 6-1-2 Sequence Application Ov er view I Sequence Editor Window Men u s and Button s Menu Cut the currently selected object and place it onto the clipboard* Copy the currently selected object and place it onto the clipboard* Paste the current clipboard contents onto the screen Select all objects on the screen* Clear the active window Cut Co[...]

  • Page 365

    20060301 Button s 6-1-3 Sequence Application Ov er view T o do this: T ap this button: Create an ordered pair table Create an arithmetic sequence table Create a geometric sequence table Create a progression of difference table Create a Fibonacci sequence table Draw a cobweb diagram on a graph Specify a n + 1 a 0 as the recursion type Specify a n + [...]

  • Page 366

    20060301 I Sequence Graph Window Men u s and Button s Edit Menu The commands on this menu are identical to those for the Sequence Editor window [Edit] menu described on page 6-1-2. Zoom Menu The commands on this menu are identical to those for the Graph & Table application [Zoom] menu described on page 3-1-4. Analy s i s Men u The [Analysis] me[...]

  • Page 367

    20060301 Input a recursion system variable a 0 , a 1 , a 2 , b 0 , b 1 , b 2 , c 0 , c 1 , or c 2 T o do this: Select one of these a 0 , a 1 menu items: Button s T o do this: T ap this button: Create a sequence table Displa y the Sequence Editor window Displa y the Sequence T able Input dialog bo x Displa y the View Window dialog bo x & 8 6 # v[...]

  • Page 368

    20060301 Sequence Application Statu s Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Sequence application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). 6-1-6 Sequence Application Ov er view Angle unit Real mode Rad Deg Cplx Real The angle unit setting is radians . The angle unit setting is degrees . The Comple x (comple x[...]

  • Page 369

    20060301 6-2 Inputting an Expre ss ion in the Sequence Application In the Sequence application, you input expressions using menus and buttons, without using the soft keyboard at the bottom of the window. Inputting Data on the Sequence Editor Window To input an expression, tap the input location you want ((a), (b), or (c)) to locate the cursor there[...]

  • Page 370

    20060301 6-3 Recur s ive and Explicit Form of a Sequence ClassPad supports use of three types of sequence expressions: a n + 1 =, a n + 2 = and a n % . Generating a Number T able In addition to ordered pair tables, the Sequence application provides you with the means to generate arithmetic sequence tables * 1 , geometric sequence tables * 2 , progr[...]

  • Page 371

    20060301 (8) Tap the down arrow button next to  , and then select @ to create the table. I Other T able T ype s The following show what the window looks like after you generate other types of tables. 6-3-2 Recursiv e and Explicit Form of a Sequence Ordered Pair Table Arithmetic Sequence Table In the above example, “4 Cells” is selected for t[...]

  • Page 372

    20060301 Graphing a Recur s ion An expression can be graphed as a connect type graph (G-Connect) or a plot type graph (G-Plot). Example: To graph a n + 1 = 2 a n +1, a 1 = 1 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. • If you have another application running, tap / and then  . • If you have the Sequence application running, t[...]

  • Page 373

    20060301 (7) Configure View Window settings as shown below. xmin = 0 xmax = 6 xscale = 1 xdot: (Specify auto setting.) ymin = –15 ymax = 65 yscale = 5 ydot: (Specify auto setting.) (8) After everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. (9) Tap the down arrow button next to  , and then select  to create the table. (10) Perform one of the follow[...]

  • Page 374

    20060301 Determining the General T erm of a Recur s ion Expre ss ion The following procedure converts the sequence expressed by a recursion expression to the general term format a n = f ( n ). Example: To determine the general term of the recursion expression a n + 1 = a n + 2, a 1 = 1 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. • [...]

  • Page 375

    20060301 Calculating the Sum of a Sequence Perform the following steps when you want to determine the sum of a specific range of the sequence of a recursion expression or a general term expression. Example: To calculate the sum of the general term expression a n E = n 2 + 2 n – 1 in the range of 2  n  10 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Start u[...]

  • Page 376

    20060301 6-4 U s ing LinkT race While the Table and Graph windows are on the display, you can activate LinkTrace. To do this, tap in the Table window to make it active. Next, tap ( and then [Link]. While LinkTrace is active, the pointer on the Graph window jumps automatically to the point indicated by the coordinates in the currently selected table[...]

  • Page 377

    20060301 6-5 Dra wing a Cobweb Diagram You can use the procedure described here to input a sequence and draw a cobweb diagram. Example: To graph , a 1 = 0.5 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. • If you have another application running, tap / and then  . • If you have the Sequence application running, tap and then [Sequ[...]

  • Page 378

    20060301 U s ing the Stati s tic s Application This chapter explains how to use the Statistics application. You can use the Statistics application to perform a variety of statistical calculations and to graph statistical data. Numeric data stored in lists can be used to perform Statistics application operations. This chapter also includes informati[...]

  • Page 379

    20060301 7-1-1 Statistics Application Ov er view 7-1 Stati s tic s Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Statistics application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. The Statistics application provides you with the tools you need to perform the operations listed below. You can also use t[...]

  • Page 380

    20060301 Star ting Up the Stati s tic s Application Use the following procedure to start up the Statistics application. S Cla ss P ad Operation On the application menu, tap  . This starts the Statistics application and displays the Stat Editor window. 7-1-2 Statistics Application Ov er view Line number Cell List name cell (variable name) Line Co[...]

  • Page 381

    20060301 Stat Editor Window Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Statistical application’s Stat Editor window. 7-1-3 Statistics Application Ov er view T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: — Open an existing list (page 7-2-3) Edit - Open List — Close the[...]

  • Page 382

    20060301 Stat Editor Window Statu s Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Stat Editor window shows the current angle unit setting (page 1-9-5), statistics View Window setting (page 7-3-2), and decimal calculation setting (page 1-9-5).   7-1-4 Statistics Application Ov er view Rad Deg Auto <blank> Standard Decimal The angle unit set[...]

  • Page 383

    20060301 7-2-1 Using Stat Editor 7-2 U s ing Stat Editor Lists play a very important role in ClassPad statistical calculations. This section provides an overview of list operations and terminology. It also explains how to use the Stat Editor, a tool for creating and maintaining lists. Ba s ic Li s t Operation s This section provides the basics of l[...]

  • Page 384

    20060301 I Creating a Li s t A list starts out with an initial default name like list1, list2, list3, etc. The Stat Editor allows you to generate list data (list variables) quickly and easily. Note • The Stat Editor window has six default list variables, named “list1” through “list6”. These lists are system variables that are defined by t[...]

  • Page 385

    20060301 S T o jump to the fir s t or la s t line of a li s t (1) Select any cell in the list. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Edit]. (3) Select one of the following commands to perform the type of operation you want. 7-2-3 Using Stat Editor Move the cursor to line 1 of the list Jump to Top Jump to Bottom Select this command: T o do this: Move the cursor[...]

  • Page 386

    20060301 I Clo s ing a Li s t Closing a list saves it under its current list (variable) name. There are two different methods you can use to close a list: using the [Close List] command, and clearing the list name from its list name cell. S To c l o s e a li s t u s ing the “Clo s e Li s t” command (1) On the Stat Editor window, select any cell[...]

  • Page 387

    20060301 (2) Input the data you want. T o input a value • Use the input keypad or soft keyboard that appears when you press . . You can also access the soft keyboard by tapping Menu. T o input a mathematical expre ss ion • Use the soft keyboard that appears when you press . . • When the “Decimal Calculation” check box is not selected (unc[...]

  • Page 388

    20060301 7-2-6 Using Stat Editor S T o batch input a s et of data Example: To input the values 1, 2, and 3 into list1 (1) On the Stat Editor window, select the “Cal” cell of the list where you want to input the data (list1 in this example). (2) Enter {1,2,3}. • To input braces ({}), press . to display the soft keyboard, and then tap the  t[...]

  • Page 389

    20060301 Editing Li s t Content s Use the procedures in this section to delete and insert elements, to clear data, and to sort data. S T o delete a li s t cell (1) On the Stat Editor window, select the cell you want to delete. (2) Tap [Edit]. (3) On the menu that appears, tap [Delete], and then tap [Cell] on the submenu that appears. • This delet[...]

  • Page 390

    20060301 Tip • Note that inserting a cell does not affect the cells in other lists. If you insert a cell in a list that is aligned with another list, the lists will become misaligned when the cells underneath are shifted downwards. Sor ting Li s t Data You can use the procedures in this section to sort the data of a list in ascending or descendin[...]

  • Page 391

    20060301 Contr olling the Number of Di s play ed Li s t Column s You can use the following procedures to control how many list columns appear on the Statistics application window. You can select 2, 3, or 4 columns. S To s pecify the number of column s f or the li s t di s pla y On the Stat Editor window, tap 3 (two columns), $ (three columns) or &a[...]

  • Page 392

    20060301 7-3 Bef ore T r ying to Dra w a Stati s tical Graph Before drawing a statistical graph, you need to first configure its “StatGraph setup” using the [SetGraph] menu. The StatGraph setup allows you to configure parameters to control the graph type, the lists that contain a graph’s data, the type of plot markers to be used, and other se[...]

  • Page 393

    20060301 Configuring StatGraph Setup s Use the procedure below to display the Set StatGraphs dialog box and configure the nine StatGraph setups. S T o di s play the Set StatGraph s dialog bo x (1) On the Stat Editor window, tap [SetGraph] and then [Setting…]. • This displays the Set StatGraphs dialog box. 7-3-2 Bef ore T r ying to Draw a Statis[...]

  • Page 394

    20060301 7-3-3 Bef ore T r ying to Draw a Statistical Gr aph S Draw Draw the graph using the StatGraph setup of the current tab Not draw the graph using the StatGraph setup of the current tab On Off Select this option: T o do this: S T ype Tap the down arrow button, and then select the graph type from the list that appears. Scatter plot Scatter xy [...]

  • Page 395

    20060301 7-3-4 Bef ore T r ying to Draw a Statistical Gr aph • The initial default frequency setting is 1. Specifying a list that causes each data value to be plotted five times helps to improve the appearance of scatter plots. • A list of frequency values can contain non-zero integers and decimal values. In the case of a MedBox, or MedMed grap[...]

  • Page 396

    20060301 7-4 Graphing Single-V ariable Stati s tical Data Single-variable data is data that consists of a single value. If you are trying to obtain the average height of the members of a single class, for example, the single variable would be height. Single-variable statistics include distributions and sums. You can produce any of the graphs descri[...]

  • Page 397

    20090601 7-4-2 Graphing Single-V ar iab le Statistical Data Hi s togram Bar Graph (Hi s togram) A histogram shows the frequency (frequency distribution) of each data class as a rectangular bar. Classes are on the horizontal axis, while frequency is on the vertical axis. I Graph P arameter Setting s (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4) • [XList] specifies the list[...]

  • Page 398

    20060301 7-4-3 Graphing Single-V ar iab le Statistical Data I Graph P arameter Setting s (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4) • [XList] specifies the list that contains the data to be plotted. • [Freq] specifies the frequency of the data. • If [Show Outliers] box is checked, “outlier” square symbols are shown instead of “whisker” lines where a data va[...]

  • Page 399

    20060301 7-4-4 Graphing Single-V ar iab le Statistical Data A dialog box like the one shown above appears before the graph is drawn. You can use this dialog box to change the start value (HStart) and step value (HStep) of the histogram, if you want. Br oken Line Graph (Broken) In the broken line graph, lines connect the pointers that fall at the ce[...]

  • Page 400

    20060301 7-5 Graphing P aired-V ariab le Stati s tical Data With paired-variable statistical data there are two values for each data item. An example of paired-variable statistical data would be the change in size of an iron bar as its temperature changes. One variable would be temperature, and the other variable is the corresponding bar size. Your[...]

  • Page 401

    20060301 (9) Tap x to draw the xy line graph. 7-5-2 Graphing P aired-V ariable Statistical Data Drawing a Regre ss ion Graph Use the procedures below to input paired-variable statistical data. Next perform regression using the data and then graph the results. Note that you can draw a regression graph without performing the regression calculation. E[...]

  • Page 402

    20060301 7-5-3 Graphing P aired-V ariable Statistical Data (6) Tap [Calc] [Logarithmic Reg]. (7) Tap [OK]. (8) Tap [OK]  . Tip • You can perform trace (page 3-7-1) on a regression graph. Trace scroll, however, is not supported when a scatter diagram is displayed.[...]

  • Page 403

    20060301 Example 2: Input the paired-variable data shown below (which is the same data as Example 1), and then draw the regression graph without performing regression calculation. list1 = 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 list2 = –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) /  (2) Input the data shown above. (3) Tap [SetGraph] and then [Setting?[...]

  • Page 404

    20090601 Drawing a Linear Regre ss ion Graph Linear regression uses the method of least squares to determine the equation that best fits your data points, and returns values for the slope and y -intercept. The graphic representation of this relationship is a linear regression graph. S Cla ss P ad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Stat[...]

  • Page 405

    20060301 Drawing a Med-Med Graph When you suspect that the data contains extreme values, you should use the Med-Med graph (which is based on medians) in place of the linear regression graph. Med-Med graph is similar to the linear regression graph, but it also minimizes the effects of extreme values. S Cla ss P ad Operation Start the graphing operat[...]

  • Page 406

    20060301 Drawing Quadratic, Cubic, and Quar tic Regre ss ion Graph s You can draw a quadratic, cubic, or quartic regression graph based on the plotted points. These graphs use the method of least squares to draw a curve that passes the vicinity of as many data points as possible. These graphs can be expressed as quadratic, cubic, and quartic regres[...]

  • Page 407

    20060301 Cubic Regre ss ion Model Formula: y = a · x 3 + b · x 2 + c · x + d a : cubic regression coefficient b : quadratic regression coefficient c : linear regression coefficient d : regression constant term ( y -intercept) r 2 : coefficient of determination MSe : mean square error Quartic Regre ss ion Model Formula: y = a · x 4 + b · x 3 + [...]

  • Page 408

    20060301 Drawing a Logarithmic Regre ss ion Graph Logarithmic regression expresses y as a logarithmic function of x . The normal logarithmic regression formula is y = a + b · ln( x ). If we say that X = ln( x ), then this formula corresponds to the linear regression formula y = a + b ·X. S Cla ss P ad Operation Start the graphing operation from t[...]

  • Page 409

    20060301 Drawing an Exponential Regre ss ion Graph ( y = a · e b · x ) Exponential regression can be used when y is proportional to the exponential function of x . The normal exponential regression formula is y = a · e b · x . If we obtain the logarithms of both sides, we get ln( y ) = ln( a ) + b · x . Next, if we say that Y = ln( y ) and A =[...]

  • Page 410

    20060301 Drawing an Exponential Regre ss ion Graph ( y = a · b x ) Exponential regression can be used when y is proportional to the exponential function of x . The normal exponential regression formula in this case is y = a · b x . If we take the natural logarithms of both sides, we get ln( y ) = ln( a ) + (ln( b )) · x . Next, if we say that Y [...]

  • Page 411

    20060301 Drawing a P ower Regre ss ion Graph ( y = a · x b ) Power regression can be used when y is proportional to the power of x . The normal power regression formula is y = a · x b . If we obtain the logarithms of both sides, we get ln( y ) = ln( a ) + b · ln( x ). Next, if we say that X = ln( x ), Y = ln( y ), and A = ln( a ), the formula co[...]

  • Page 412

    20060301 The following is the sinusoidal regression model formula. y = a ·sin( b · x + c ) + d Tip • Make sure that “Radian” is selected for the [Angle] setting on the Basic Format dialog box (page 1-9-4) before drawing a sinusoidal regression graph. The graph cannot be drawn correctly when the [Angle] setting is “Degree”. • Certain t[...]

  • Page 413

    20060301 Drawing a Logi s tic Regre ss ion Graph ( ) Logistic regression is best for data whose values continually increase over time, until a saturation point is reached. S Cla ss P ad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statistics application’s Graph window or List window. From the Graph windo w Tap [Calc] [Logistic Reg] [OK] [OK] ?[...]

  • Page 414

    20060301 Overla ying a Function Graph on a Stati s tical Graph You can overlay an existing statistical graph with any type of function graph. Example: Input the two sets of data shown below, and plot the data on a scatter plot. Next, overlay the scatter plot with the graph of y = 2 · ln( x ). list1 = 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 list2 = –2.1, 0.3, 1.[...]

  • Page 415

    20060301 7-6 U s ing the Stati s tical Graph Windo w T oolbar The following describes the operations you can perform using the toolbar on the Statistical Graph window. 7-6-1 Using the Statistical Graph Window T oolbar Display the Stat Editor window ( Display the Graph Editor window ! Redraw the displayed graph " Display the View Window dialog [...]

  • Page 416

    20090601 7-7 P erf orming Stati s tical Calculation s You can perform statistical calculations without drawing a graph by tapping [Calc] on the menu bar and selecting [One-Variable] or [Two-Variable]. Viewing Single-v ariable Stati s tical Calculation Re s ult s Besides using a graph, you can also use the following procedure to view the single-vari[...]

  • Page 417

    20090601 Viewing P aired-variab le Stati s tical Calculation Re s ult s Besides using a graph, you can also use the following procedure to view the paired-variable statistics parameter values. S T o di s play paired-v ariable calculation re s ult s (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Two-Variable]. (2) On the dialog box that appears, specify [...]

  • Page 418

    20060301 Viewing Regre ss ion Calculation Re s ult s To view regression calculation results, tap [Calc] on the menu bar and then tap the type of calculation results you want. 7-7-3 P erforming Statistical Calculations • You can also use the [DispStat] option to display the last calculated statistical results. For details about regression calculat[...]

  • Page 419

    20060301 S T o view “re s idual” s y s tem v ariable v alue s 7-7-4 P erforming Statistical Calculations (1) Tap here. (2) Tap here, and enter “residual”. • To input lower-case alpha characters, tap the soft keyboard’s  tab. (3) Tap U . Copying a Regre ss ion Form ula to the Graph & T able Application You can use the following pr[...]

  • Page 420

    20060301 7-8 T e s t, Confidence Inter v al, and Di s tribution Calculation s You can use a wizard to perform test, confidence interval and distribution calculations in the Statistics application or write a program in the Program application. In the Statistics application, you can perform the calculations using the wizard that you launch by tapping[...]

  • Page 421

    20060301 7-8-2 T est, Confidence Inter v al, and Distribution Calculations I Example 1: 1-Sample Z Te s t μ  condition : x μ 0  : 0 σ  : 3 M : 24.5 n : 48 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) ; / 1 (2) Tap / . (3) On the New File dialog box that appears, configure the settings as described below. Type: Program(Normal) Folder: Select the name[...]

  • Page 422

    20060301 7-8-3 T est, Confidence Inter v al, and Distribution Calculations Time A1 113, 116 Temperature B1 139, 132 Time A2 133, 131 126, 122 Temperature B2 I Example 2: T wo-W ay ANO V A The values in the table below are measurement results that show how the durability of a metal product is affected by changes in heat treatment time (A) and tempe[...]

  • Page 423

    20060301 7-8-4 T est, Confidence Inter v al, and Distribution Calculations The above results indicate that altering the time is not significant, altering the temperature is significant, and interaction between time and temperature is highly significant. (10) Tap P .[...]

  • Page 424

    20060301 7-9-1 T ests 7-9 T e s t s The following is a list of tests, and a description of what each one tests for. Z Test Description T est Name The Z Test provides a variety of different tests based on standard deviation based tests. They make it possible to test whether or not a sample accurately represents the population when the standard devia[...]

  • Page 425

    20060301 The following pages explain how to perform various statistical calculations based on the above principles. Further details about statistical theory and terminology can be found in any standard statistics textbook. Tip • Always make sure you insert one space between a command and its parameters. In the following examples, spaces are indic[...]

  • Page 426

    20090601 7-9-3 T ests Calculation Re s ult Output μ x 0 : test condition z : z value p : p -value M : sample mean s x : sample standard deviation (Displayed only for list format.) n : sample size Example Mean : 131 Sample size : 10 Population standard deviation : 19 Assumed population mean : 120 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu b[...]

  • Page 427

    20090601 2-Sample Z Te s t Menu: [Test]-[Two-Sample ZTest] De s cription: Tests a hypothesis relative to the population mean of two populations when the standard deviations of the two populations are known. A 2-Sample Z Test is used for normal distributions. Z = M 1 — M 2 n 1 1 2 n 2 2 2 + M 1 : sample mean of sample 1 data M 2 : sample mean of s[...]

  • Page 428

    20060301 Example Sample A Sample B Size 40 45 Standard deviation 23.16 18.51 Mean 65.43 71.87 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (2) Select [Two-Sample ZTest] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Select the μ 1 condition [ x ] and input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display th[...]

  • Page 429

    20060301 7-9-6 T ests Definition of T erm s Prop condition : sample proportion test condition (“ x ” specifies two-tail test, “<” specifies lower one-tail test, “>” specifies upper one-tail test.) p 0 : expected sample proportion (0 < p 0 < 1) x : sample value (integer, x  0) n : sample size (positive integer) Calculation[...]

  • Page 430

    20090601 Definition of T erm s p 1 condition : sample proportion test conditions (“ x ” specifies two-tail test, “<” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample 2, “>” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than sample 2.) x 1 : data value (integer, x 1  0) of sample 1 n 1 : size of sample 1 (positi[...]

  • Page 431

    20090601 I t Te s t 1-Sample t Te s t Menu: [Test]-[One-Sample TTest] De s cription: Tests a hypothesis relative to a population mean when population standard deviation is unknown. A 1-Sample t Test is used for t distribution. M : sample mean μ 0 : assumed population mean s x : sample standard deviation n : sample size Definition of T erm s μ [...]

  • Page 432

    20090601 (7) To display the graph, tap  . Example 2 (calculation with parameter) Standard deviation : 80.6 Mean : 295.6 Sample size : 9 Assumed population mean : 250 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (2) Select [One-Sample TTest] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Select the μ con[...]

  • Page 433

    20090601 2-Sample t Te s t Menu: [Test]-[Two-Sample TTest] De s cription: This command compares the population means of two populations when population standard deviation is unknown. A 2-Sample t Test is used for t distribution. M 1 : sample mean of sample 1 data M 2 : sample mean of sample 2 data s x 1 : sample standard deviation of sample 1 s x 2[...]

  • Page 434

    20090601 7-9-11 T ests Calculation Re s ult Output μ 1 x μ 2 : test condition t : t value p : p -value df : degrees of freedom M 1 : sample mean of sample 1 data M 2 : sample mean of sample 2 data s x 1 : sample standard deviation of sample 1 s x 2 : sample standard deviation of sample 2 s p : Pooled sample standard deviation (Displayed only when[...]

  • Page 435

    20090601 Input Example: Syntax 1 (li s t format) TwoSampleTTest “<”,list1,list2,1,1,Off Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleTTest “ x ”,107.5,0.78,10,97.5,0.65,12,Off Linear Regre ss ion t Te s t Menu: [Test]-[Linear Reg TTest] De s cription: This command treats two groups of data as paired variables ( x , y ). The method of least squar[...]

  • Page 436

    20060301 7-9-13 T ests Example list1 : { 38, 56, 59, 64, 74 } list2 : { 41, 63, 70, 72, 84 } • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] and [list2] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (3) Select [Linear Reg TTest] and then tap [Next >>]. (4) Select the β & R condition [ x ]. (5) Se[...]

  • Page 437

    20090601 7-9-14 T ests Calculation Re s ult Output C 2 : C 2 value p : p -value df : degrees of freedom Example a = 11 68 3 9 23 5 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1)  (2) Input the matrix and assign it to variable a . (3) /  (4) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (5) Select [ C 2 Test] and then tap [Next >>]. (6) Input [...]

  • Page 438

    20090601 7-9-15 T ests C 2 GOF T e s t Menu: [Test]-[ C 2 GOF Test] De s cription: This command tests whether the frequency of sample data fits a certain distribution. For example, it can be used to determine conformance with normal distribution or binomial distribution. O i : The i -th element of the observed list E i : The i -th element of the ex[...]

  • Page 439

    20090601 7-9-16 T ests I 2-Sample F Te s t 2-Sample F Te s t Menu: [Test]-[Two-Sample FTest] De s cription: This command tests hypotheses concerning the ratio of the population variance of two populations. A 2-Sample F Test uses F distribution. Definition of T erm s σ 1 condition: population standard deviation test conditions (“ x ” specifies [...]

  • Page 440

    20090601 7-9-17 T ests S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: TwoSampleFTest : Command Syntax Syntax 1 (li s t format) “ σ 1 condition”, List(1), List(2), Freq(1) (or 1), Freq(2) (or 1) * “Freq” can be omitted. Doing so sets “1” for “Freq”. Syntax 2 (parameter format) “ σ 1 condition”, s x 1 value, n 1 value, s x 2[...]

  • Page 441

    20090601 7-9-18 T ests Example list1 : { 7, 4, 6, 6, 5 } list2 : { 6, 5, 5, 8, 7 } list3 : { 4, 7, 6, 7, 6 } • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1], [list2] and [list3] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (3) Select [One-Way ANOVA] and then tap [Next >>]. (4) Select Lists [list1], [[...]

  • Page 442

    20090601 AB df : df of Factor A s Factor B AB MS : MS of Factor A s Factor B AB SS : SS of Factor A s Factor B AB F : F value of Factor A s Factor B AB p : p -value of Factor A s Factor B Note that “AB df ”, “AB MS ”, “AB SS ”, “AB F ”, and “AB p ” are not displayed if there are no repeated data pairs. Err df : df of error Err M[...]

  • Page 443

    20060301 7-10-1 Confidence Inter v als 7-10 Confidence Inter v al s A confidence interval is a range of values that has a specified probability of containing the parameter being estimated. A confidence interval that is too broad makes it difficult to get an idea of where the parameter (actual value) is located. A narrow confidence interval, on the [...]

  • Page 444

    20090601 Confidence Interval Command Li s t I Z Confidence Interval 1-Sample Z Interval Menu: [Interval]-[One-Sample ZInt] De s cription: This command obtains the confidence interval for the population mean when the population standard deviation is known. The confidence interval is obtained using the following expressions. Lower = o – Z  2 [...]

  • Page 445

    20090601 Example 2 (calculation with parameter) Mean : 300 Sample size : 6 Population standard deviation : 3 Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (2) Select [One-Sample ZInt] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [...]

  • Page 446

    20090601 Definition of T erm s C-Level : confidence level (0  C-Level < 1) σ 1 : population standard deviation of sample 1 ( σ 1 > 0) σ 2 : population standard deviation of sample 2 ( σ 2 > 0) List(1) : list where sample 1 data is located List(2) : list where sample 2 data is located Freq(1) : frequency of sample 1 (1 or list name) [...]

  • Page 447

    20090601 Input Example: Syntax 1 (li s t format) TwoSampleZInt 0.95,15.5,13.5,list1,list2,1,1 Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleZInt 0.95,1,1.5,418,40,402,50 1-Prop Z Interv al Menu: [Interval]-[One-Prop ZInt] De s cription: This command obtains the confidence interval of the proportion of successes in a population. The confidence interval is ob[...]

  • Page 448

    20090601 7-10-6 Confidence Inter v als S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: OnePropZ Int : Command Syntax C-Level value, x value, n value Input Example: OnePropZInt 0.99,2048,4040 2-Prop Z Interv al Menu: [Interval]-[Two-Prop ZInt] De s cription: This command obtains the confidence interval of the difference between the proportions of[...]

  • Page 449

    20090601 Example Data1 : 49, sample size : 61 Data2 : 38, sample size : 62 Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (2) Select [Two-Prop ZInt] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Appli[...]

  • Page 450

    20090601 Calculation Re s ult Output Lower : interval lower limit (left edge) Upper : interval upper limit (right edge) M : sample mean s x : sample standard deviation n : sample size Example list1 : { 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9 } Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] in the S[...]

  • Page 451

    20090601 When the two population standard deviations are equal (pooled) When the two population standard deviations are not equal (not pooled) Definition of T erm s C-Level : confidence level (0  C-Level < 1) List(1) : list where sample 1 data is located List(2) : list where sample 2 data is located Freq(1) : frequency of sample 1 (1 or list [...]

  • Page 452

    20090601 Example list1 : { 12.207, 16.869, 25.05, 22,429, 8.456, 10.589 } list2 : { 11.074, 9.686, 12.064, 9.351, 8.182, 6.642 } Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] and [list2] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (3) Select [Two-S[...]

  • Page 453

    20060301 7-11-1 Distributions 7-11 Di s trib ution s Though there are a number of different types of distributions, the one most commonly used is the “Normal Distribution”, which is an essential type of distribution for statistical calculations. Other types of distributions include the Poisson distribution and geometric distribution. The type o[...]

  • Page 454

    20090601 7-11-2 Distributions Description Distribution Name Calculates the probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial. Calculates the cumulative probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur on or before a specified trial. Calculates the minimum number of trials of a binomial cumulat[...]

  • Page 455

    20090601 Di s trib ution Command Li s t Impor tant! Though list data can be used within the argument of the Distribution function (page 2-8-48), list data cannot be used in the argument of the Statistics Wizard operations described here or in operations that use the Distribution command in the applications. For details about using list data within [...]

  • Page 456

    20090601 7-11-4 Distributions S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: NormPD : Command Syntax x value, σ value, μ value Input Example: NormPD 37.5,2,35 Normal Cumulative Di s trib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Normal CD] De s cription: This command calculates the probability of normal distribution data falling between a and b . dx a : lo[...]

  • Page 457

    20090601 7-11-5 Distributions S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: NormCD : Command Syntax Lower value, Upper value, σ value, μ value Input Example: NormCD − d ,36,2,35 In ver s e Normal Cumulative Di s trib ution Menu: [Inv. Distribution]-[Inverse Normal CD] De s cription: This command calculates the cumulative probability in a n[...]

  • Page 458

    20090601 7-11-6 Distributions S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvNormCD : or InvNorm : Command Syntax “Tail setting”, Area value, σ value, μ value Input Example: InvNorm “L”,0.7,2,35 I t Di s trib ution Student- t Probability Den s ity Menu: [Distribution]-[Student-T PD] De s cription: This command calculates t probabil[...]

  • Page 459

    20090601 S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: TPD : Command Syntax x value, df value Input Example: TPD 2,5 Student- t Cumulative Di s trib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Student-T CD] De s cription: This command calculates the probability of the Student- t distribution data falling between a and b . p =   . df  2 df 2 df + 1 ?[...]

  • Page 460

    20090601 7-11-8 Distributions S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: TCD : Command Syntax Lower value, Upper value, df value Input Example: TCD 1.5, d ,18 In ver s e Student- t Cumulative Di s trib ution Menu: [Inv. Distribution]-[Inverse T CD] De s cription: This command calculates the inverse of the t cumulative distribution. This com[...]

  • Page 461

    20060301 7-11-9 Distributions I C 2 Di s trib ution C 2 Probability Den s ity Menu: [Distribution]-[ C 2 PD] De s cription: This command calculates the probability density of C 2 distribution from a specified x value. f ( x ) =  1 2 df df 2 x e 2 1 df 2 –1 x 2 – Definition of T erm s x : data value df : degrees of freedom (positive integer) [...]

  • Page 462

    20090601 C 2 Cumulative Di s trib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[ C 2 CD ] De s cription: This command calculates the probability of C 2 distribution data falling between a and b . p =  1 2 df df 2 x e dx 2 1 df 2 –1 x 2 – a b a : lower bound (Lower) b : upper bound (Upper) Definition of T erm s Lower : lower bound Upper : upper bound df : degr[...]

  • Page 463

    20060301 Definition of T erm s pr ob : C 2 cumulative probability ( p , 0  p  1) df : degrees of freedom (positive integer) Calculation Re s ult Output x Inv : inverse C 2 cumulative distribution Example Probability : 0.6092146 Degrees of freedom : 4 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. ([...]

  • Page 464

    20060301 Example Data : 1.5 Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [F PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Ma[...]

  • Page 465

    20090601 Example Lower bound : 1.5 (upper bound : d ) Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [F CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S[...]

  • Page 466

    20090601 Example Probability : 0.1852 Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse F CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Com[...]

  • Page 467

    20090601 Example Trials : 5 Specified trial : 3 Probability of success : 0.63 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Binomial PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Comm[...]

  • Page 468

    20090601 20091101 Example T rials : 5 Low er bound : 2 Upper bound : 3 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar , tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Binomial CD] and then tap [Ne xt >>]. (3) Input v alues. (4) T ap [Next >>]. (5) T o display the g raph, tap $ . u Program, eActivity o[...]

  • Page 469

    20090601 Example Binomial cumulative probability : 0.61 Trials : 5 Probability of success : 0.63 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse Binomial CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvB[...]

  • Page 470

    20090601 Example Specified trial : 10 Mean : 6 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Poisson PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: PoissonPD : Command Syntax [...]

  • Page 471

    20090601 Example Lower bound : 2 Upper bound : 3 Mean : 2.26 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Poisson CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: PoissonCD : C[...]

  • Page 472

    20090601 Example Poisson cumulative probability : 0.8074 Mean : 2.26 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse Poisson CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvPoissonCD : Command Syntax pr [...]

  • Page 473

    20090601 Example Specified trial : 6 Probability of success : 0.4 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Geometric PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: GeoPD [...]

  • Page 474

    20090601 Example Lower bound : 2 Upper bound : 3 Probability of success : 0.5 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Geometric CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Com[...]

  • Page 475

    20090601 Example Geometric cumulative probability : 0.875 Probability of success : 0.5 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse Geo CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvGeoCD : Command [...]

  • Page 476

    20090601 Example Specified trial: 1 Number of trials from population: 5 Number of successes in population: 10 Population size: 20 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Hypergeometric PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph[...]

  • Page 477

    20090601 • Stati s tic s Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Hypergeometric CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap  . S Pr ogram, eActivity or Main Application Command: HypergeoCD : Command Syntax Lower value, Upper value, n va[...]

  • Page 478

    20090601 Example Hypergeometric cumulative probability: 0.3 Number of trials from population: 5 Number of successes in population: 10 Population size: 20 • Stati s tic s Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse Hypergeometric] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >&[...]

  • Page 479

    20060301 7-12 Stati s tical Sy s tem V ariable s Performing a statistical calculation, graphing operation, or other operation causes calculation results to be assigned to pre-arranged system variables. For more information, see the “System Variable Table” on page A -7-1. 7-12-1 Statistical System V ariables[...]

  • Page 480

    20060301 U s ing the Geometr y Application The Geometry application allows you to draw and analyze geometric figures. You can draw a triangle and specify values to change the size of its sides so they are 3:4:5, and then check the measurement of each of its angles. Or you can draw a circle and then draw a line that is tangent to a particular point [...]

  • Page 481

    20060301 8-1-1 Geometr y Application Ov er view 8-1 Geometry Application Over view The Geometry application provides you with the following capabilities. • The [Draw] menu provides commands for drawing points, lines, polygons, regular polygons, circles, ellipses, and other geometric figures. You can also draw functions. Once drawn, a figure can b[...]

  • Page 482

    20060301 • Tapping the toolbar’s right arrow button displays a measurement box. The measurement box displays information for the items that are selected on the window. For example, you can view the coordinates of a point, the length and slope of a line segment, the size of an angle, etc. You can also use the measurement box to change measuremen[...]

  • Page 483

    20060301 Geometry Application Menu s and Button s This section describes the configuration of the Geometry application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Tip • menu items are the same for all applications. For more information, see “ Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. • The View Window ( - [View Window]) and Ge[...]

  • Page 484

    20060301 8-1-4 Geometr y Application Ov er view I Edit Menu Undo or redo the last operation Undo/Redo Clear all settings fixed with the measurement box Clear Constraints Show hidden objects Show All Toggle polygon shading on and off Shade On/Off Hide the currently selected object Properties - Hide Show hidden names Properties - Show Name Hide the s[...]

  • Page 485

    20060301 8-1-5 Geometr y Application Ov er view I View Menu T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this View menu item: Zoom Box T Q Activate the pan function for dragging the Graph window with the stylus Pan W Enlarge the display image Zoom In E Reduce the size of the display image Zoom Out R Adjust the size of the display image so it fills the [...]

  • Page 486

    20060301 I T oolbar Button The operation described below is available from the toolbar only. 8-1-6 Geometr y Application Ov er view Activate Toggle Select (page 8-3-2) Tap i and then tap a figure. Do this: T o do this: Tapping a button highlights it, indicating that the button’s function is turned on. I About the Mea s urement Bo x Tapping the 5 [...]

  • Page 487

    20060301 8-2-1 Dra wing Figures [Draw] men u command s T oolbar 8-2 Dra wing Figure s This section explains how to use the Geometry application to draw various types of figures. It also explains how to use the geometric construction tools to investigate theorems and properties in Geometry. U s ing the Draw Men u The [Draw] menu makes it easy to dra[...]

  • Page 488

    20060301 S T o draw a line s egment u s ing the men u command (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Line Segment]. • This highlights the line segment button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the screen where you want the line segment to begin, and a point will be drawn, and then tap the point where you want it to end. 8-2-2 Dra wing Figures Tip • Use [Edit] - [Clear [...]

  • Page 489

    20060301 S T o draw a line s egment u s ing the toolbar (1) Tap the second down arrow on the toolbar. This opens the [Draw] menu’s icon palette. (2) Tap the line segment button on the toolbar to highlight it. (3) Tap the screen where you want the line segment to begin. This plots a point. (4) Tap the beginning point again and, without lifting the[...]

  • Page 490

    20060301 S T o add a labeled point to an e xi s ting line You can use the following procedure to add a labeled point to an existing line, to a side of an n-gon, to the periphery of a circle or ellipse, etc. (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Point]. • This highlights the point button on the toolbar. (2) Drag the stylus on the screen towards the line where[...]

  • Page 491

    20060301 8-2-5 Dra wing Figures S T o draw a ra y Example: To draw a ray and then determine its y = f ( x ) linear equation by dropping the ray into the Main or eActivity application window (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Ray]. • This highlights the ray button on the toolbar. (2) Tap two points on the screen. • You could also tap one point and then dr[...]

  • Page 492

    20060301 S T o draw a vector (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Vector]. • This highlights the vector button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the point where you want the vector to start, and then its end point. • You could also tap one point, and then drag to the vector end point. 8-2-6 Dra wing Figures S T o draw a cir cle (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Circle]. • [...]

  • Page 493

    20060301 8-2-7 Dra wing Figures S T o draw a function Example: To draw y ( x ) = x 2 – 1 (1) Tap [Draw], [Function], and then [f( x )]. • This causes the Function dialog box and a soft keyboard to appear. (2) Input the function. (3) Tap [OK] to draw it.[...]

  • Page 494

    20060301 (1) Tap [Draw], [Function], and then [Polar]. • This displays the Function dialog box and a soft keyboard as shown here. 8-2-8 Dra wing Figures S T o draw a polar equation graph Note In this example the [Function Angle] setting of the Geometry Format dialog box is set to “Radian”. See page 1-9-10 for more information. (2) Input the e[...]

  • Page 495

    20060301 Tip • You can drag a polar curve from the Geometry window and drop it into a Main or eActivity window. Or, for example, you can drag the equation r = f ( θ ) from the Main or eActivity window and drop it into the Geometry window as shown below. S T o draw a parametric equation graph 8-2-9 Dra wing Figures Note In this example the [Funct[...]

  • Page 496

    20060301 Tip • You can display equations such as ( x ( t ), y ( t )) on the Geometry window by dragging the equation and dropping it into the Main or eActivity window. When you do, however, the equation appears as text (it does not graph the equation). 8-2-10 Dra wing Figures (2) Input the following expressions and values: x t = cos(t), y t = sin[...]

  • Page 497

    20060301 S T o draw an ellip s e u s ing the [Ellip s e] - [Ax e s ] command Note When you draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Axes] command, you need to specify the following three elements: center point, Point 1 and Point 2. Point 1 defines the minor axis (nearest point on the edge from the center point) and Point 2 defines the major axis (far[...]

  • Page 498

    20060301 S T o draw an ellip s e u s ing the [Ellip s e] - [Foci] command Note An ellipse is the locus of points, the sum of whose distances from two fixed points (called f oci ) is a constant. An ellipse drawn using the [Ellipse] - [Foci] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw an ellipse with the [Foci] command, you nee[...]

  • Page 499

    20060301 (3)Tap the point you want to specify as Point 3. • This specifies the point you tap as Point 3 and draws the ellipse. • Instead of tapping the screen to specify Point 3, you could also drag the stylus on the display. As soon as you tap and hold the stylus on the screen, the line connecting Point 1 and Point 2 will bend to show the dist[...]

  • Page 500

    20060301 S T o draw a h yperbola Note A h yperbola is the locus of points, the difference of whose distances from two fixed points (called f oci ) is a given value. A hyperbola drawn using the [Hyperbola] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw a hyperbola with the [Hyperbola] command, you need to specify three different [...]

  • Page 501

    20060301 • Instead of tapping the screen to specify Point 3, you could also drag the stylus on the display. As soon as you tap and hold the stylus on the screen, the line connecting Point 1 and Point 2 will bend to show the distance from the foci to the location of the stylus, as shown below. Move the stylus to the location where you want Point 3[...]

  • Page 502

    20060301 S T o draw a parabola Note A parabola is the locus of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix). A parabola drawn using the [Parabola] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw an parabola with the [Parabola] command, you need to specify three different points: a line to define the dire[...]

  • Page 503

    20060301 S T o draw a pol ygon (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Polygon]. • This highlights the polygon button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the point from which you want the polygon to start. (3) Sequentially tap each of the vertices of the polygon. (4) Finally, tap the start point again to complete the polygon. 8-2-17 Dra wing Figures[...]

  • Page 504

    20090601 In s er ting T ext String s into the Screen You can insert text strings into the screen while working on the Geometry application window. S T o in s er t a text s tring into a s creen (1) Tap [Draw] and [Text]. • This displays the Text dialog box and a soft keyboard. (2) Input the text you want on the dialog box. • You can input alphan[...]

  • Page 505

    20060301 Drag and Dr op Text on the Geometry window can be dragged to the Main or eActivity window. You can also drop text from these application windows into the Geometry window. Attaching an Angle Mea s urement to a Figure The measurement of an angle formed by two sides of a figure can be attached to the figure as shown here. To do so, tap [Attac[...]

  • Page 506

    20060301 Tip • The two sides of a figure actually forms four angles, numbered  through  in the illustration shown here. After attaching an angle measurement using the [Attached Angle] command, you can drag it to the position of any one of the other three angles as shown in the examples below.     S T o attach an angle mea s urem[...]

  • Page 507

    20060301 Example: To drag the angle measurement attached to interior angle A of triangle ABC to its exterior complementary angle (Dragging to the complementary angle of the opposite angle of A) (Dragging to the opposite angle of A) 8-2-21 Dra wing Figures Tip • You can display more than one attached angle. To do this in the above example, first d[...]

  • Page 508

    20060301 8-2-22 Dra wing Figures Di s pla ying the Mea s urement s of a Figure You can display measurements on the Geometry application window. The measurements change dynamically as you manipulate the figure. A Li s t of [Mea s urement] Submenu Command s on the [Dra w] Menu Name s of Command s Meaning s of Each Command Angle Angle between two line[...]

  • Page 509

    20060301 (3) Tap [Draw], [Measurement], and then [Angle]. • This shows the angle measurement on the screen. Method 2: Selecting the value in the mea s urement box and dr opping it directly into the Geometry application window (1) Tap ' and select elements AB and AC. (2) Tap the 5 button to the right of the toolbar. • This displays the meas[...]

  • Page 510

    20060301 (3) Select (highlight) value in the measurement box and drop it into the screen below. • This displays the specified angle measurement on the screen as shown below. Method 3: T apping the mea s urement icon button to the left of the mea s urement bo x (1) Tap ' and select elements AB and AC. (2) Tap the 5 button to the right of the [...]

  • Page 511

    20060301 Di s pla ying the Re s ult of a Calculation that U s e s On- s creen Mea s urement V alue s You can use the [Expression] command and the commands on the [Measurement] submenu to perform calculations using the angle value, line length, surface area, and other measurement values attached to a figure, and display the result on the Geometry wi[...]

  • Page 512

    20060301 (8) Tap the 5 button to the right of the toolbar. This will display the measurement box. • The above will also display numeric labels for each measurement currently on the screen. (9) Now you can use the numeric labels to specify measurement values in the calculation you input in the measurement box. • To input a measurement value in t[...]

  • Page 513

    20060301 U s ing the Special Shape Submenu The [Special Shape] submenu allows you to draw specially shaped figures automatically. Simply select the type of figure you want from the menu, and then touch the screen with the stylus to draw it. Or, touch the screen with your stylus and drag to create a box indicating the size of the figure you would li[...]

  • Page 514

    20060301 S T o draw a triangle (1) Tap [Draw], [Special Shape], and then [Triangle]. • This highlights the triangle button on the toolbar. (2) Perform either of the following two operations to draw the triangle. • Tap the screen with the stylus. This automatically draws the acute triangle you selected. • Place the stylus on the screen and dra[...]

  • Page 515

    20060301 (3) Perform either of the following two operations to draw the regular polygon. • Tap the screen with the stylus. This automatically draws the polygon you selected. • Place the stylus on the screen and drag diagonally in any direction. This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the polygon that will be drawn. Th[...]

  • Page 516

    20060301 U s ing the Con s truct Submenu The [Construct] submenu provides you with the means to study various geometric theorems. In addition to tools for constructing a perpendicular bisector, perpendicular line, angle bisector, midpoint, intersection, parallel lines and a tangent to a curve, you can also translate, rotate, reflect, dilate, or tra[...]

  • Page 517

    20060301 8-2-31 Dra wing Figures S T o con s truct a perpendicular bi s ector (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Tap ' , and then select the line segment. (3) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Perp. Bisector]. • This draws a perpendicular bisector through your line segment. S T o con s truct an angle bi s ector (1) Draw two line segments so they [...]

  • Page 518

    20060301 8-2-32 Dra wing Figures S T o con s truct a midpoint (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Tap ' , and then select the line segment. (3) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Midpoint]. • This adds a midpoint to the segment. S T o con s truct the point of inter s ection of tw o line s (1) Draw two lines that intersect. (2) Tap ' , and then[...]

  • Page 519

    20060301 8-2-33 Dra wing Figures S T o con s truct a perpendicular line that pa ss e s through a s pecified point on a line (1) Draw a line segment or an infinite line. (2) Draw a point on the line through which you want the perpendicular line to pass. (3) Tap ' , and then select the point and the line. (4) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [P[...]

  • Page 520

    20060301 8-2-34 Dra wing Figures S T o con s truct a tang ent to a curve through a s pecified point (1) Draw a curve, such as an ellipse. (2) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Tangent to Curve]. • This highlights the tangent to a curve button on the toolbar. (3) Tap the point of tangency on the curve. • This draws the tangent. S T o tran s lat[...]

  • Page 521

    20060301 8-2-35 Dra wing Figures (1) Draw a line segment (AB), and a vector to use in the translation. Next, select the line segment. (2) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Translation]. • This displays the Translation dialog box. (3) Tap [Select Vector]. (4) Tap the vector on the screen. • This translates line segment AB in accordance with the[...]

  • Page 522

    20060301 8-2-36 Dra wing Figures S T o reflect a line s egment with re s pect to a s pecified line of s ymmetry (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Draw a line to use as the line of symmetry. (3) Tap ' , and then select the line segment. (4) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Reflection]. • This highlights the reflection button on the toolbar. (5) [...]

  • Page 523

    20060301 8-2-37 Dra wing Figures T ran s formation U s ing a Matrix or V ector (General T ran s form) General Transform lets you input a matrix and/or vector to transform a figure. The result of the transformation is drawn as a separate figure. For example, if you transform line segment AB, the line segment A’B’ will be drawn. You can perform t[...]

  • Page 524

    20060301 Tip • All of the steps in the procedure below are performed using the Geometry application only. You can also use the Main application or eActivity application to perform matrix calculations and obtain the same transformation. You can drag a figure from Geometry to Main, which transforms values (matrix) and performs calculation, and drag[...]

  • Page 525

    20060301 (5) Tap [OK]. • This draws triangle A’B’C’, which is symmetrical to triangle ABC about the x -axis. (6) Tap anywhere outside of the triangles to deselect the currently selected triangle. Next, select triangle A’B’C’. (7) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [General Transform]. (8) Now, to perform parallel displacement on triang[...]

  • Page 526

    20060301 (9) Tap [OK]. • This performs the parallel displacement and draws triangle A’’B’’C’’. Note • In the above example, we performed the transformation and the parallel displacement operations separately. You could also perform both operations at the same time, if you want. To do so, input both the matrix [[1, 0], [0, – 1]] an[...]

  • Page 527

    20060301 I (a) Operation Example The following procedure assumes that the results produced by the procedure under “General Transform Example” on page 8-2-37 are still on the Geometry application window. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap  to start up the Main application. (2) Tap the right most down arrow button on the [...]

  • Page 528

    20060301 Impor tant! • This operation is valid only when a point in the original figure and the corresponding point in the transformed figure are selected in the Geometry application. Nothing is displayed when you select points A and A’’ in the above procedure and drag them to the Main application work area. Observe this area of the expressio[...]

  • Page 529

    20060301 (5) Select the triangle and drag it to the cursor location in the Main application work area. • This inputs a matrix that shows the coordinates of the triangle’s three vertices into the work area. 8-2-43 Dra wing Figures (6) Here, try multiplying by the matrix [[–1, 0], [0, 1]] to transform the matrix obtained above to a form that is[...]

  • Page 530

    20060301 8-2-44 Dra wing Figures (7) Select the matrix obtained as the calculation result, and drag it to the Geometry window. • This draws a triangle that is symmetrical to the original triangle about the y -axis.[...]

  • Page 531

    20060301 8-3 Editing Figure s This section provides details about moving, copying, and deleting Geometry application figures. Selecting and De s electing Figure s Before you can execute certain editing commands, you must first select the figure you want to edit. There are two figure selection modes: Select and Toggle Select, each of which is descri[...]

  • Page 532

    20060301 I U s ing T oggle Select Tap on the toolbar. This causes the button to become highlighted, indicating that Toggle Select is enabled. Toggle Select allows you to select and deselect figures. For example, if you have multiple figures selected, Toggle Select will allow you to deselect a single part of the selection. Tapping the part again wil[...]

  • Page 533

    20060301 8-3-3 Editing Figures S T o copy a figure (1) Draw a figure, and then select it. (2) Tap [Edit], and then [Copy]. (3) Tap anywhere on the screen to deselect the figure. (4) Tap [Edit], and then [Paste]. (5) Drag the pasted figure to the location you want. Mo ving and Copying Figure s It is easy to move figures or copy and paste figures in [...]

  • Page 534

    20060301 Pinning an Annotation on the Geometry Window You can pin an annotation on the Geometry window using the Pin function. By default, annotations are ‘Unpinned’, so they pan or zoom along with the Geometry window. Pinning an annotation fixes its position on the screen so it is always displayed in the same location on the Geometry window. E[...]

  • Page 535

    20060301 Specifying the Number Format of a Mea s urement You can specify the number format for each measurement on the Geometry window. Example: To specify zero decimal places for measurement values on the Geometry window (1) Select (highlight) the measurement(s). (2) Tap the [Edit], [Properties], and then [Number Format]. • This displays the Num[...]

  • Page 536

    20060301 (4) Tap [OK]. • This will display the measurement value(s) you selected in the step 1 using the specified number format. Tip The initial default number format setting for measurement values is “Fix 2”. U s ing the Mea s urement Bo x Tapping the 5 button to the right of the toolbar displays the measurement box. Tap 4 to return to the [...]

  • Page 537

    20060301 8-3-7 Editing Figures I Viewing the Mea s urement s of a Figure The type of information that appears in the measurement box depends on the figure that is currently selected on the display. If a line segment is selected, for example, the measurement box shows the distance, slope, angle from the x -axis, and the equation for that line. You c[...]

  • Page 538

    20060301 8-3-8 Editing Figures Icon Icon Name This icon appears when this is selected: T apping this icon displays: Lockable K e 6 Angle Yes Q t Two line segments Angle and its supplement formed by the line segments Tangency Yes Two circles or arcs, or a line and circle Whether two items are tangent Congruence Yes Two line segments Whether line seg[...]

  • Page 539

    20060301 8-3-9 Editing Figures (3) Select points A, D, and B. • This causes the area of the triangle ADB to appear in the measurement box. (4) Tap anywhere outside of the parallelogram to deselect the current points, and then select points A, D, and C. • This causes the area of the triangle ADC to appear in the measurement box. The above proced[...]

  • Page 540

    20060301 8-3-10 Editing Figures (4) Tap the down arrow next to the measurement box to cycle through other measurements. • In the case of the line segment, for example, you can view its length, slope, direction, and equation. I Specifying a Mea s urement of a Figure The following example shows how to specify an angle of a triangle. S To s pecify t[...]

  • Page 541

    20060301 8-3-11 Editing Figures A highlighted check box indicates the measurement is fixed (constrained). I Fixing a Mea s urement of a Figure By “fixing a measurement” we mean that a constraint is placed on the figure. For example, if we fix (constrain) a point to a circle and move the circle, the point will also move. The following example sh[...]

  • Page 542

    20060301 (2) Input a new name (“Center”) in the measurement box. (3) Tap  or the check box to the right side of measurement box. • This displays the changed name on the screen as shown here. 8-3-12 Editing Figures[...]

  • Page 543

    20060301 8-4 Contr olling Geometry Window Appearance This section provides information about how to control the appearance of the Geometry application window by scrolling or zooming, and by showing or hiding axes and the grid. Configuring View Windo w Setting s You can use the following procedures to configure settings that control the appearance o[...]

  • Page 544

    20060301 8-4-2 Controlling Geometr y Window Appearance Tip • You can also turn on the Integer Grid by tapping [View] and then [Integer Grid]. See page 8-4-3 for more information. Axes off, values off Axes on, values off Axes on, values on Selecting the Axi s Setting Tap Q , or tap [View] and then [Toggle Axes] to cycle through the four settings s[...]

  • Page 545

    20060301 8-4-3 Controlling Geometr y Window Appearance Zooming The Geometry application provides you with a selection of zoom commands that you can use to enlarge or reduce an entire display image or a specific area of a figure. Tip • The screenshots in this section all use the “Axes on, values on” setting described under “Selecting the Axi[...]

  • Page 546

    20060301 8-4-4 Controlling Geometr y Window Appearance S To u s e Zoom In and Out Example 1: To zoom in on a circle (1) Draw a circle. (2) Tap [View] and then [Zoom In], or tap 7 . • This enlarges the circle. Example 2: To zoom out on a circle (1) Draw a circle. (2) Tap [View] and then [Zoom Out] or tap % . • This reduces the size of the circle[...]

  • Page 547

    20060301 8-4-5 Controlling Geometr y Window Appearance Tip • You can also perform the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Zoom to Fit operations by pressing ClassPad keys as described below. T o do thi s : Pre ss thi s key: Zoom In  Zoom Out  Zoom to Fit  S To u s e Zoom to Fit (1) Draw the figure or figures you want. • If what you are drawing does[...]

  • Page 548

    20060301 8-4-6 Controlling Geometr y Window Appearance U s ing P an to Shift the Di s pla y Image Panning makes it easy to shift the display image by dragging with the stylus. Tip • The screenshot in this section uses the “Axes on, values on” setting described under “Selecting the Axis Setting” on page 8-4-2. S To u s e Pan Example: To pa[...]

  • Page 549

    20060301 8-5 W orking with Animation s An animation consists of one or more point/curve pairs, in which the curve can be a line segment, circle, ellipse, or function. You build an animation by selecting a point/curve pair, and then adding it to an animation. U s ing Animation Command s You can build and run an animation either by executing menu com[...]

  • Page 550

    20060301 S T o add an animation and run it (1) Plot a point and draw an arc. Or, you could draw a circle, ellipse, line segment, or function instead of an arc. (2) Select the point and arc. 8-5-2 W orking with Animations (3) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Add Animation]. (4) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)], [Go (repeat)], or [Go (to a[...]

  • Page 551

    20060301 S T o animate a point ar ound a circ le (1) Plot a point and draw a circle, and then select them. 8-5-3 W orking with Animations Tip • You can repeat the above procedure to create multiple points that move simultaneously. Try this: • Draw a line segment and plot another point. • Select the line segment and the point. • Repeat steps[...]

  • Page 552

    20060301 (3) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)]. • This causes the point to travel around the circumference of the circle. S T o replace the current animation with a new one (1) Select the point and curve for the new animation. (2) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Replace Animation]. • This discards the currently set animation and sets[...]

  • Page 553

    20060301 (6) Select line segments AB and DE, enter 90 in the measurement box, and tap the check box next to the measurement box. • This fixes the angle between AB and DE at 90 degrees. 8-5-5 W orking with Animations (7) Select only line segments DE and DC, and then tap the down arrow next to the measurement box. (8) Tap the E icon, and then selec[...]

  • Page 554

    20060301 S T o edit an animation (1) While the animation you want to edit is on the display, tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Edit Animations]. • This displays the animation editing window in the lower window. The upper window contains the animation that we just completed in “To trace a locus of points”. See page 8-5-4 for information about s[...]

  • Page 555

    20060301 8-5-7 W orking with Animations Measurement box T race s This item shows the specified trace point. Tapping [Remove] cancels the trace point setting. (3) While the lower window is active, tap and then [Close] to close the animation editing window. S T o view an animation tab le (1) Draw a triangle and a line segment above the triangle. (2) [...]

  • Page 556

    20060301 8-5-8 W orking with Animations (6) With the line and vertex point still selected, tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Add Animation]. (7) Now, select only one side of the triangle. (8) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)]. (9) Tap  next to the measurement box. • While the animation is running, the lower window shows the table for [...]

  • Page 557

    20060301 8-6 U s ing the Geometry Application with Other Application s You can display the Geometry application from within the eActivity or Main application. This is a great feature that allows you to visualize the relationship between Algebra and Geometry. You can, for example, drag a figure from the Geometry window to the eActivity window to see[...]

  • Page 558

    20060301 (4) Select the circle and drag it to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the equation of the circle in the eActivity window. (5) You can now experiment with the data in the eActivity window. Tip • Try modifying the radius of the circle in the eActivity window. Highlight your modified equation, then drag it [...]

  • Page 559

    20060301 Example 2: To drag two sides of a triangle from the Geometry window to the Main window S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap / to display the application menu, and then tap  to start the Main application. (2) Tap  to display the Geometry window in the lower half of the screen. Geometry window (3) Draw a triangle on the Geometry window. (4)[...]

  • Page 560

    20060301 (5) Press  . • Notice that the solution is the same as the coordinates of point A. 8-6-4 Using the Geometr y Application with Other Applications • To show the coordinates of A, just select point A. Its coordinates will be displayed in the status bar. Tip • Try using this drag and drop method to find the point of intersection of tw[...]

  • Page 561

    20060301 8-6-5 Using the Geometr y Application with Other Applications Copy and P a s te In addition to drag and drop, you can also copy figures or columns from an animation table, and paste them into another application. Example of dynamically linked data For information on how to create a dynamic link between a geometric figure and its equation i[...]

  • Page 562

    20090601 8-7 Managing Geometry Application File s This section covers file management operations such as save, open, delete, rename, move, etc. 8-7-1 Managing Geometr y Application Files Tip • You can also use the Variable Manager (page 1-8-1) to manage Geometry application files. File Operation s S To s ave a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Save].[...]

  • Page 563

    20060301 (3) Enter the file name you want to find and then tap [Search]. • File names that match the one you enter become highlighted on the display. Tapping [Open] opens the highlighted file. • To search for the next occurrence of the file name, tap [Search] again and then tap [Next] on the Search dialog box. S T o open an exi s ting file (1) [...]

  • Page 564

    20060301 S To s ave a file under a diff erent name (1) Tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. 8-7-3 Managing Geometr y Application Files (4) Tap [Save]. S T o delete a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Select the check box next to the file you want to delete. • You can se[...]

  • Page 565

    20060301 8-7-4 Managing Geometr y Application Files S T o rename a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Tap the name of the file you want to rename so it is selected. (3) Tap [File] and then [Rename]. • This displays the Rename dialog box. (4) Enter the new file name. (5) In response to the confirmation[...]

  • Page 566

    20060301 S T o delete a f older W arning! Deleting a folder also deletes all files inside of it. Please double-check to make sure you no longer need the contents of a folder before deleting it. (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Select the check box next to the folder you want to delete. • You can select m[...]

  • Page 567

    20060301 9 U s ing the Numeric Solver Application This chapter provides information about the functions of the Numeric Solver application, referred to as NumSolve, and explains how to perform Numeric Solver procedures. Numeric Solver lets you obtain the value of any variable in an equation without the need to transform or simplify the equation. 9-1[...]

  • Page 568

    20060301 9-1-1 Numeric Solver Application Ov er view 9-1 Numeric Solver Application Over vie w This section describes the configuration of the Numeric Solver application windows and provides basic information about Numeric Solver menu and commands. Numeric Solver Application Window Starting up Numeric Solver application displays the window shown be[...]

  • Page 569

    20060301 I T oolbar The toolbar provides you with easy access to the Main application, 3D Graph Editor, Graph Editor, and, of course, Solve. I Drag ging an Expre ss ion from the Other Application to the Numeric Solver Window You can drag expression and equations from the Main application window or Graph Editor window and drop them into the Numeri[...]

  • Page 570

    20060301 9-2 U s ing Numeric Solver Numeric Solver lets you obtain the value of any variable in an equation, without the need to transform or simplify the equation. Example: t is the time it would take for an object thrown straight up with initial velocity v to reach height h. Use the formula below to calculate the initial velocity v for a height o[...]

  • Page 571

    20060301 9-2-2 Using Numeric Solver (6) Tap  , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • The [Left–Right] value shows the difference between the left side and right side results. Tip • Numeric Solver solves functions by calculating approximations based on Newton’s method. This means that solutions may include errors[...]

  • Page 572

    20060301 9-2-3 Using Numeric Solver (6) Tap ( then [Convergence]. (7) Enter 10 and then tap [OK]. (8) Tap  , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • The software is now able to converge to a solution.[...]

  • Page 573

    20060301 U s ing the eActivity Application An eActivity is both a documentation tool, and a student notebook. As a documentation tool, a teacher can create electronic examples and practice problems with accompanying text, mathematical expressions, 2D and 3D graphs, geometric drawings, and tables. eActivities provide the student the means to explore[...]

  • Page 574

    20060301 10-1-1 eActivity Application Ov er view 10-1 eActivity Application Over vie w The eActivity application lets you input and edit text, mathematical expressions, and ClassPad application data, and save your input in a file called an “eActivity”. The techniques you will use are similar to those of a standard word processor, and they are e[...]

  • Page 575

    20060301 eActivity Application Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and toolbar buttons of the eActivity application. • For information about the menu, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I File Menu 10-1-2 eActivity Application Ov er view I Edit Menu New Open Save Select this File menu item[...]

  • Page 576

    20060301 I In s er t Menu I Action Menu 10-1-3 eActivity Application Ov er view Calculation Row — — — ~ 3 $ ! % @ ^ * y ( 1 & _ Q W Text Row Geometry Link Insert an application data strip Strip - Main Strip - Geometry Strip - Graph Strip - Graph Editor Strip - 3D Graph Strip - 3D Graph Editor Strip - Conics Graph Strip - Conics Editor Str[...]

  • Page 577

    20060301 10-1-4 eActivity Application Ov er view eActivity Application Statu s Bar The information that appears in the eActivity application status bar is same as the Main application status bar information. See “Using Main Application Modes” on page 2-1-4. eActivity Ke y Operation s In the eActivity application, the cursor key,  key, and ?[...]

  • Page 578

    20060301 10-1-5 eActivity Application Ov er view Tip When the shift operation is assigned to the ClassPad 9 key, you can select a range of characters with the left and right cursor keys. Simply press the ClassPad 9 key and then press C or B . Each press of the cursor key will select (highlight) the next character in the applicable direction. Exampl[...]

  • Page 579

    20060301 10-2 Creating an eActivity This provides a general overview of eActivity operations, from starting up the eActivity application to saving an eActivity file. It also presents precautions you need to keep in mind when managing eActivity files. Ba s ic Step s f or Creating an eActivity The following are the basic steps you need to perform whe[...]

  • Page 580

    20090601 (3) After the eActivity is the way you want, tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. This is a list of folders and files. Select the name of the folder where you want to save the eActivity file by tapping it. Tap here to create a new folder. Enter up to 20 characters for the eActivity file name. 10-2-2 Creating [...]

  • Page 581

    20090601 Managing eActivity File s This section covers file management operations like save, open, delete, rename, move, etc. Performing one of these operations displays a Files dialog box like the ones shown below. The buttons that appear in the dialog box depend on the operation you performed to display the Files dialog box. 10-2-3 Creating an eA[...]

  • Page 582

    20060301 10-3 In s er ting Data into an eActivity The following describes the four types of data you can insert into an eActivity. 10-3-1 Inser ting Data into an eActivity In s er ting a T ext Ro w Text rows make it possible to display and edit text directly in the eActivity window. Text rows can contain multiple lines, as well as mathematical expr[...]

  • Page 583

    20060301 Tip • The toolbar button for switching between input modes appears as U while the cursor is located in a text row, and while the cursor is located in a calculation row. 10-3-2 Inser ting Data into an eActivity S T o in s er t a T ext Ro w (1) Tap to change a row to the Text Input mode. • If the cursor is located in a line that already [...]

  • Page 584

    20060301 10-3-3 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Impor tant! • You cannot bold numeric expressions of a natural display expression that you input with the 2D soft keyboard. In s er ting a Calculation Ro w Calculation rows let you perform calculations in an eActivity. When you input a mathematical expression, the output expression (result) appear[...]

  • Page 585

    20060301 Tip • The toolbar button for switching between input modes appears as U while the cursor is located in a text row, and while the cursor is located in a calculation row. Line 1: Expression you input Line 2: Result S T o in s er t a Calculation Row (1) Tap U to change a row from the Text Input mode to the Calculation Input mode. • If the[...]

  • Page 586

    20060301 10-3-5 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Changing “10 2 b ” to “20 2 b ” in the example below and pressing  causes all of the expressions under “20 2 b ” to be re-calculated. • Tap to the right of “10”. • Press  twice, and then input “20”. • Press  . S T o run a pr ogram in the eActivity application You c[...]

  • Page 587

    20060301 10-3-6 Inser ting Data into an eActivity I In s er ting an Application Data Strip into an eActivity Tap the [Insert] menu or the right most toolbar down arrow button, and then select the command or button that corresponds to the type of application data you want to insert. Select this [Insert] menu item: T o inser t this type of applicatio[...]

  • Page 588

    20060301 Example 1: To insert a Geometry data strip S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) From the eActivity menu, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Geometry]. • This inserts a Geometry data strip, and displays the Geometry window in the lower half of the screen. 10-3-7 Inser ting Data into an eActivity (2) On the Geometry window, draw the figure you want. [...]

  • Page 589

    20060301 (4) Tap the title box of the Geometry data strip and enter the title you want. 10-3-8 Inser ting Data into an eActivity • If you want to input more data into the eActivity, tap the next line or use the [Insert] menu to select the type of strip you want to insert next. Example 2: To insert a Graph data strip S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On[...]

  • Page 590

    20060301 (3) After you finish performing the operation you want on the Graph window, tap R , or tap and then [Close] to close the Graph window. You will also need to tap the Graph Editor window, and then select then [Close] to return to the eActivity window. (4) Tap the title box of the Graph data strip and enter the title you want. 10-3-9 Inser ti[...]

  • Page 591

    20060301 Example 3: To use Notes in an eActivity Notes is a simple text editing tool for taking notes or including in-depth explanations within an eActivity. You can use Notes to store information for later use, or as a place to jot down ideas. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Notes]. • This in[...]

  • Page 592

    20060301 10-3-11 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Tip • You can use the Notes window to enter notes, homework assignments, in-depth details, etc. • All information you enter is treated as text. • When inputting text into a Notes window, the cursor will jump down to the beginning of the next line when the right edge of the current line is rea[...]

  • Page 593

    20060301 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Picture]. • This will insert a Picture strip and display the Picture window in the lower half of the display. (2) Tap [File] - [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. The Files dialog box displays only data whose data type is PICT. (3) On the Pi[...]

  • Page 594

    20060301 (4) Tap [Open]. • This will display the PICT data you selected in the Picture window. • You can use the File menu and toolbar to perform following operations while the Picture window is on the display. T o do thi s : Select thi s File menu item: Or tap thi s button: Open a bitmap (PICT data type) image Open – Save an open bitmap imag[...]

  • Page 595

    20060301 Strip Help T ext You can add help text to any strip. A strip that has help text is indicated by a button. Tapping a button will display the help window along with the application window. S T o add help te xt to a s trip (1) Tap the title box of the strip to which you want to add help text. (2) Tap [Insert] - [Add Strip Help]. • A help wi[...]

  • Page 596

    20060301 Mo ving Information Between eActivity and Application s An eActivity is like an interactive notebook or textbook that allows you to explore the world of mathematics right on the page. You can take almost any expression from an eActivity page and send it to another application. You can also take information from an application and insert it[...]

  • Page 597

    20060301 10-3-16 Inser ting Data into an eActivity I Drag and Dr op You can drag and drop text or mathematical expressions between eActivity and other applications. You can also drag and drop within an eActivity. Depending on the application, you can drag text and mathematical expressions from an eActivity to another application window. For example[...]

  • Page 598

    20060301 In s er ting a Geometry Link Row A Geometry Link row dynamically links data in the Geometry window with the corresponding data in an eActivity. You can display lines and figures drawn in Geometry as values and mathematical expressions in a Geometry Link row. Dragging a line or figure from the Geometry window to a Geometry Link row in an eA[...]

  • Page 599

    20060301 (4) Tap [Insert] and then [Geometry Link]. • This inserts a Geometry Link row in the next line. 10-3-18 Inser ting Data into an eActivity (5) Tap the Geometry window to make it active. (6) Tap one side of the triangle to select it, and then drag it to the link symbol in the eActivity window. • This inputs the equation of the line that [...]

  • Page 600

    20060301 10-4 W orking with eActivity File s You can perform basic file operations on eActivity files. You can open previously saved files, edit an existing file, and save a file under a new name. Opening an Exi s ting eActivity Perform the following steps to open an existing eActivity file. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [...]

  • Page 601

    20060301 Editing the Content s of an eActivity To edit an eActivity, you can use the same procedures that you used when you created it. For more information, see “10-3 Inserting Data into an eActivity”. Expanding an Application Data Strip Tapping the expand button of an application data strip expands the application data in the lower window. Th[...]

  • Page 602

    20090601 S T o replace the original eActivity file with the newl y edited ver s ion (1) On the eActivity window, tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. 10-4-3 W orking with eActivity Files (2) Tap [Save] without changing the displayed file name. • This causes the original eActivity file to be replaced by the newly edi[...]

  • Page 603

    20060301 S To s ave an edited eActivity under a diff erent name (1) On the eActivity window, tap [ , or tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) If you want, tap the name of the folder where you want the new eActivity file to be saved. (3) Tap the file name input box, and input the new file name you want to use. (4) W[...]

  • Page 604

    20060301 10-5 T ran s ferring eActivity File s Note the following precautions when using the ClassPad’s data communication function to transfer eActivity files with another ClassPad unit or a computer. T ran s ferring eActivity File s between T wo Cla ss P ad Unit s I T ran s ferring eActivity File s to Another Cla ss P ad Unit To transfer an eAc[...]

  • Page 605

    20060301 I T ran s ferring eActivity File s fr om Another Cla ss P ad Unit To transfer an eActivity file from another ClassPad unit, your ClassPad unit must support all of the application data strips that are supported by the sending unit. Impor tant! • If you transfer an eActivity file from a ClassPad unit that supports application data strips t[...]

  • Page 606

    20060301 U s ing the Pre s entation Application The Presentation application lets you capture screenshots of other application windows. Screenshots can be used in the classroom or for other presentations simply by connecting the ClassPad to an OHP projector. 11-1 Pre s entation Application Overview 11-2 Building a Pre s entation 11-3 Managing Pre s[...]

  • Page 607

    20060301 11-1-1 Presentation Application Ov er view 11-1 Pre s entation Application Overview The Presentation application lets you capture screenshots produced by the ClassPad, and arrange them into a “presentation” that you can play back. With this application you can build and play a presentation, and edit the contents of a presentation. A pr[...]

  • Page 608

    20090601 Pre s entation Application Window Tapping ! on the application menu starts the Presentation application and displays its initial screen. • Selecting [Disabled] will cause the [Screen Copy To] setting on the Presentation and Communication dialog boxes to change automatically to [Outer Device]. For more information, see “11-6 Configuring[...]

  • Page 609

    20060301 Pre s entation Application Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Presentation application’s initial screen. I Initial Screen Menu Command s and Button s T o do thi s : Tap thi s button: Or s elect thi s menu item: Delete the presentation file whose option button is cur[...]

  • Page 610

    20060301 Screen Capture Precaution s Note the following precautions when capturing screens for a presentation. • The operation that is performed when you tap - depends on the current [Screen Copy To] setting as described below. When the [ Screen Copy T o] s etting i s thi s : T apping - doe s thi s : Outer Device Sends the screenshot to an extern[...]

  • Page 611

    20060301 11-2 Building a Pre s entation Presentations are created by capturing screenshots that are produced by the applications of the ClassPad. Before actually beginning to capture the screenshots, it is important to carefully think about and plan the type of information you want to include in your presentation so that your screenshots display th[...]

  • Page 612

    20060301 (6) With the screen you want to capture on the display, tap - . • The currently displayed screen is captured as soon as you tap - . Its image is added to the pages of the presentation file you selected in step (3). • If the capture is successful, “ ” appears in the status bar for about one second. (7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) to ca[...]

  • Page 613

    20060301 S T o in s er t a blank page into a pre s entation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentation file into which you want to insert the blank page, so it is selected. (2) Tap ( and then [White Screen]. • This inserts a blank page as the final page of the presentation file you selected in step[...]

  • Page 614

    20060301 11-3 Managing Pre s entation File s After you create a presentation file, you can rename it or delete it. S T o rename a pre s entation file (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the name of the file you want to rename so it is selected. (2) Press C . • This causes a cursor to appear to the right of the last character o[...]

  • Page 615

    20060301 11-3-2 Managing Presentation Files Impor tant! • PICT format image data files (PICT data type variables) captured with the - icon are stored in folder that is created when you create a Presentation file. • The “Presystm” folder (whose contents you can view with the Variable Manager) contains files for managing presentations. Normal[...]

  • Page 616

    20060301 11-4 Pla ying a Pre s entation This section explains the various methods you can use to play a presentation. U s ing A uto Pla y With auto play, the pages of the presentation are scrolled automatically at a fixed interval. S Cla ss Pad Operation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentation fil[...]

  • Page 617

    20060301 U s ing Manual Pla y With manual play, you control when page change operations are performed during presentation play. Manual play lets you scroll forward or back through presentation pages, and you can display a pointer on a page. S Cla ss Pad Operation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the present[...]

  • Page 618

    20060301 (4) Tapping while the final page of the presentation is displayed causes the message “End of Files” to appear in the status bar. • Tapping while the message “End of Files” is in the status bar exits the manual play operation and displays the Presentation initial screen. Tapping while “End of Files” is in the status bar return[...]

  • Page 619

    20060301 11-5 Editing Pre s entation P age s This section explains how to use the Editing mode of the Presentation application to modify the pages of an existing presentation. About the Editing T ool P alette An editing tool palette appears on the display whenever you enter the Editing mode. The following describes how to use the editing tool palet[...]

  • Page 620

    20060301 (3) Use the editing tool palette buttons to edit the pages. • For details about editing operations, see “Editing Operations” on page 11-5-3. • You can drag the editing tool palette and page scroll buttons to any location on the display. Simply use the stylus to drag the handle of the palette or buttons. S T o exit the Editing mode [...]

  • Page 621

    20060301 Editing Operation s This section provides details about the page editing operations you can perform with the Presentation application’s editing tool palette. S T o move a pa ge (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page you want to move. (3) Tap  to mov[...]

  • Page 622

    20060301 S T o copy and pa s te a pa ge (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page you want to copy, and then tap T . • This copies the currently displayed page to the clipboard. (3) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page that you want to follow the copied[...]

  • Page 623

    20060301 (6) To save the result of the text insert operation, tap [ and then tap [OK] on the confirmation dialog box that appears. S T o clear the bottom half of the s creen (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page whose bottom half you want to clear. (3) Tap  .[...]

  • Page 624

    20060301 S T o draw a s traight line or an arr ow on a pa ge (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page on which you want to draw a straight line or arrow. (3) Tap I if you want to draw a line or O if you want to draw an arrow. (4) Tap the point where you want one en[...]

  • Page 625

    20060301 U s ing the Era s er The eraser allows you to erase parts of an image, text, arrows, or lines you have added to a page. S T o era s e par t of a page with the era s er (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll arrows to display the page that contains the figures you want to erase. (3)[...]

  • Page 626

    20060301 11-6 Configuring Pre s entation Preference s You can use the procedure below to configure various Presentation application preferences. S Cla ss Pad Operation (1) Tap , and then [Presentation]. • This displays the Presentation dialog box. (2) Use the Presentation dialog box to configure the preferences you want. T o do thi s : Do thi s :[...]

  • Page 627

    20060301 Tip • The following examples show the area of the screen that is captured when you tap - while the [Half Screen Capturing] check box is selected. The captured areas are indicated by the thick boundaries in each example. Sample Screenshot Sample Screenshot Captured Image Data Captured Image Data 11-6-2 Configuring Presentation Preferences[...]

  • Page 628

    20060301 11-7 Pre s entation File T ran s f er A presentation file is actually a kind of user folder (called a “presentation folder”) that contains the images that make up the presentation. This folder may be transferred to another ClassPad unit or a computer in order to play the presentation. Caution • A presentation created with Version 3.0[...]

  • Page 629

    20060301 Chapter 12 U s ing the Pr ogram Application The Program application comes in handy when you need to perform the same calculation a number of times. You can create programs that automate graphing and other operations. 12-1 Program Application Overview 12-2 Creating a New Pr ogram 12-3 Debug ging a Program 12-4 Managing File s 12-5 U s er -d[...]

  • Page 630

    20060301 12-1 Pr ogram Application Over vie w The Program application consists of a Program Editor for inputting and editing programs, and a Program Loader for loading and executing existing programs. Star ting Up the Pr ogram Application Use the following procedure to start up the Program application. S Cla ss P ad Operation On the application men[...]

  • Page 631

    20060301 12-1-2 Program Application Ov er view I Pr ogram Loader Window Menu s and Button s T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s menu item: Display the Program Loader window — - Program Loader Display the Program Editor window 0 - Program Editor Display the Program Output window ? - Program Output Display the Text File Contents wind[...]

  • Page 632

    20090601 File type N: Program file T : Text file F : User-defined function file File name Parameter variables This box can be used to specify variable names used in user-defined functions or programs. For details, see “Configuring Parameter Variables and Inputting Their Values” on page 12-2-7. Pr ogram Editor Window You can use the Program Edit[...]

  • Page 633

    20060301 I Pr ogram Editor Window Menu s and Button s The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform on the Program Editor window. 12-1-4 Program Application Ov er view T o do this: T a p this button: O r select this menu item: Display the Program Loader window Display the Program Editor window Display the Main application w[...]

  • Page 634

    20090601 T o do this: Select this menu item: Input a command from the [Ctrl] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. Input a command from the [I/O] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. — — Lbl, Goto For, To, Step, Next Do, LpWhile While, WhileEnd ’, ”, [...]

  • Page 635

    20090601 T o do this: Select this menu item : Input a command from the [Misc] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. StatGraph, StatGraphSel, Scatter, xyLine, NPPlot, Histogram, MedBox, ModBox, NDist, Broken, LinearR, MedMed, QuadR, CubicR, QuartR, LogR, ExpR, abExpR, PowerR, SinR, LogisticR Square, Cross[...]

  • Page 636

    20090601 T o do this: Select this menu item: Input a command from the [Misc] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. On, Off, DefaultSetup, SetStandard, SetDecimal, SetReal, SetComplex, SetDegree, SetGrad, SetRadian, SetNormal, SetFix, SetSci SetStatWinAuto, SetCellWidth, SetSequence, StepDisp, Set ∑ dis[...]

  • Page 637

    20060301 12-2 Creating a New Pr ogram This section explains the steps you need to perform in order to create a new program. General Pr ogramming Step s The following are the general steps for creating and running a program. 1. Open a new file. • Tap / , or select the [Edit] menu and then [New File]. 2. Input a name and tap [OK]. 3. Input the expr[...]

  • Page 638

    20060301 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap / to display the application menu, and then 1 . (2) Tap / , or tap [Edit] and then [New File]. (3) Configure the settings for the new file as described below. • Leave the [Type] setting as “Program(Normal)”. • Tap the [Folder] down arrow button and then select the name of the folder where you want to[...]

  • Page 639

    20060301 12-2-3 Creating a New Prog ram (6) After the program is the way you want, tap [ , or tap [Edit] and then [Save File] to save it. • To run this program see “Running a Program” on page 12-2-5. • If a message appears when you try to save the program, make the necessary corrections and try again. For details about making corrections to[...]

  • Page 640

    20060301 I Specifying the File T ype Tapping / or tapping [Edit] and then [New File] on the Program Editor window displays the dialog box shown above. Tap the [Type] down arrow button and then select one of the options described below from the list of options that appears. Tip • For information about text files, see “Using Text Files” below. [...]

  • Page 641

    20060301 12-2-5 Creating a New Prog ram Running a Pr ogram The following procedure shows how to run the sample program we input under “Creating and Saving a Program” on page 12-2-1. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Display the Program Loader window. • From the Program Editor window, tap  , or tap and then [Program Loader]. • From another appl[...]

  • Page 642

    20060301 12-2-6 Creating a New Prog ram Pa u s ing Program Ex ecution You can specify where execution of a program should pause by including either a Pa u s e command or a W ait command inside the program. I U s ing the Pau s e Command A Pa u s e command causes program execution to pause when it reaches that point. To resume program execution, tap [...]

  • Page 643

    20060301 12-2-7 Creating a New Prog ram Configuring P arameter V ariable s and Inputting Their V alue s If you input the names of variables used in a program into the parameter variable box when inputting or editing a program on the Program Editor window, you will be able to input values for the variables on the Program Loader window when you run t[...]

  • Page 644

    20060301 U s ing Subr outine s Including the name of another program file inside of a program causes execution to jump to the specified program file. The program that execution jumps from is called the “main program”, while the program to which execution jumps is called a “subroutine”. When program execution returns to the main program, it [...]

  • Page 645

    20060301 Example 1: Jumping to a subroutine without assigning values to the subroutine’s parameter variables Main Program Input A Input B Sub1( ) k Jumps to subroutine program “Sub1” Print C Subroutine (Pr ogram Name: “Sub1”) A+B 2 C Return Example 2: Jumping to a subroutine while assigning values to the subroutine’s parameter variables[...]

  • Page 646

    20060301 12-3 Deb ugging a Pr ogram A programming error that causes a program to behave in a manner not intended by the writer of the program is called a “bug”. Finding and eliminating such errors is called “debugging the program”. Any of the following conditions can indicate that your program has a bug and requires debugging. • If an err[...]

  • Page 647

    20060301 Modifying an Exi s ting Pr ogram to Create a New One You can use the procedure described below to recall an existing program, modify it, and then run the result as a new program. This helps reduce key input requirements. The following shows how to modify the “OCTA” program we created on page 12-2-1 to handle tetrahedrons. Example: To c[...]

  • Page 648

    20060301 (3) Select the program you want to open and edit, as described below. 12-3-3 Debugging a Prog ram (4) Tap [OK]. F older T ype T ap the down arro w b utton, and then select “Program(Normal)”. T ap the down arro w button, and then select the f older that contains the program you w ant to edit. Name T ap the down arro w button, and then s[...]

  • Page 649

    20060301 (7) After saving the program, tap  , or tap and then [Program Loader] to display the Program Loader window. (8) On the dialog box that appears, tap the [Name] down arrow button, and then tap the name of the file you input in step (6) (TETRA). (9) Tap P , or tap [Run] and then [Run Program]. • This runs the program. (10) Input 7 for th[...]

  • Page 650

    20060301 Sear ching f or Data In s ide a Program You can search for data inside a program by specifying a keyword. Example: To search for the letter “A” within the “OCTA” program S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) From the Program Editor window, select the program you want to search (“OCTA” in this example). (2) Tap [Edit], [Search], and then [...]

  • Page 651

    20060301 12-4 Managing File s Renaming a File Use the following procedure when you want to change the name of a file. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap  to display the Variable Manager. • This displays a list of folders. • You may need to tap the icon and scroll the toolbar to see the  icon. (2) Tap the name of the folder that contains the [...]

  • Page 652

    20060301 Changing the File T ype You can use the following procedures to change the file type. S T o change a pr ogram file to a text file While a program file is open, tap [Edit], [Mode Change], and then [  Text]. S T o change a text file to a pr ogram file While a text file is open, tap [Edit], [Mode Change], and then [  Normal]. Tip • [...]

  • Page 653

    20060301 12-5 U s er -defined Function s ClassPad lets you configure calculation operations as user-defined functions, which can then be used inside of numeric expressions just like its built-in functions. User-defined functions can also be called up in other applications. • The Program Editor window is used for creating user-defined functions. ?[...]

  • Page 654

    20060301 (6) After the function is the way you want, tap [ , or tap [Edit] and then [Save File] to save it. Tip • A user-defined function can contain only a single mathematical expression. An error “Invalid in a Function or Current Expression” occurs if a user-defined function contains multiple expressions, or is followed by a carriage return[...]

  • Page 655

    20060301 Tip • You can include up to 99 arguments in a function. • If you do not specify a folder, the function is stored in the current folder. • A function defined using the Define command can contain only a single expression. You cannot link multiple expressions or commands using colons ( : ) or carriage returns. Executing a U s er -define[...]

  • Page 656

    20060301 Editing a U s er -defined Function To edit an existing user-defined function, use the same procedures as those described under “Modifying an Existing Program to Create a New One” on page 12-3-2. Editing procedures are the same, regardless of whether you originally created the function using the Define command or Program Editor. Deletin[...]

  • Page 657

    20060301 12-6 Pr ogram Command Reference U s ing Thi s Reference The following table shows the conventions that are used in the descriptions of this section. 12-6-1 Program Command Ref erence A boldf ace word, lik e Input It mean s thi s : If y ou s ee s omething like thi s : The boldf ace word is a command. 10 This is a constant. 10 + 20 This is a[...]

  • Page 658

    20060301 Pr ogram Application Command s I Pr ogram Notation (Carriage Return) Function: Performs a carriage return operation. De s cription In Program Editor, tap the U button to input a carriage return. • The carriage return can be used in a user program. It cannot, however, be used in a manual calculation performed in the Main application. ’ [...]

  • Page 659

    20060301 I Input GetKe y Syntax: GetKey : <variable name> Function: This command assigns the code number of the last key pressed to the specified variable. De s cription • This command assigns the code number of the last key pressed to the specified variable. The following shows a list of available code numbers. 12-6-3 Program Command Ref e[...]

  • Page 660

    20060301 12-6-4 Program Command Ref erence GetP en Syntax: GetPen : <variable name 1>, <variable name 2> Function: This command assigns the coordinates of the point tapped on the screen to a specified variable. De s cription This command assigns the x -coordinate (horizontal axis) to <variable 1> and the y -coordinate (vertical ax[...]

  • Page 661

    20060301 InputFunc Syntax: InputFunc : <user-defined function name> (<argument >[,<argument >…]) [,"<string 1>"[,"<string 2>"]] Function: When program execution reaches the InputFunc command, the user is prompted to input the contents of the user-defined function. Example: InputFunc v(v0, t), &quo[...]

  • Page 662

    20060301 12-6-6 Program Command Ref erence I Output About the Program Output windo w The “Program Output window” shows text displayed by program execution. The term “Program Output window” does not include dialog boxes displayed by Me ss age and other commands. • Only one Program Output window can be stored at a time. Executing the ClrT e[...]

  • Page 663

    20060301 Locate Syntax 1: Locate : < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate>, <expression> Syntax 2: Locate : < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate>, "<string>" Function: This command displays the result of the specified expression or the specified text string at the specified coordinates on the display screen. De[...]

  • Page 664

    20060301 PrintNatural Syntax:   PrintNatural : <expression>[,"<string>"] Function: This command pauses program execution and displays the result of the specified expression in natural format. 12-6-8 Program Command Ref erence De s cription • A text string enclosed within quotation marks (" ") or a variable name c[...]

  • Page 665

    20060301 12-6-9 Program Command Ref erence Break Syntax: Break Function: This command terminates a loop and causes execution to advance to the next command following the loop process. De s cription • Break terminates a loop and causes execution to advance to the next command following the loop process. • Break can be used inside of a For , Do ,[...]

  • Page 666

    20060301 For ~ T o ~ (Step ~)Next Syntax: For : <expression 1> 2 <control variable name> : To : <expression 2> [Step : <expression 3>] [<statement>] … Next <expression 1> is the initial value, <expression 2> is the end value, and <expression 3> is the step. Function Anything between the For command [...]

  • Page 667

    20060301 If~Then~El s eIf~El s e~IfEnd Syntax 1: If : <expression> Then [<statement>] … IfEnd Function 1 • If the expression is true, the statement in the Then block is executed. After that, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd . • If the expression is false, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd , w[...]

  • Page 668

    20060301 Syntax 4: If : <expression> Then [<statement>] … ElseIf : <expression> Then [<statement>] … Else [<statement>] … IfEnd Function 4 • If the expression is true, the statement in the If Then block is executed. After that, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd . • If the If command express[...]

  • Page 669

    20060301 De s cription • You can perform manual operations on the ClassPad display screen while program execution is paused by the Pa u s e command. • Program execution remains paused until you tap the button on the status bar, or until six minutes pass (after which program execution resumes automatically). Return Syntax: Return : {<variable[...]

  • Page 670

    20060301 Switch~Ca s e~Default~SwitchEnd Syntax: Switch : <expression 1> Case : <expression 2> [<statement>] … Break Case : <expression 3> … [<statement>] … Break … Case : <expression n > [<statement>] … Break [Default] [<statement>] … SwitchEnd <expression 1> through <expression [...]

  • Page 671

    20060301 While~WhileEnd Syntax: While : <expression> [<statement>] … WhileEnd <expression> is a condition that evaluates to true or false. Function: The specified statements are repeated as long as the condition is true. De s cription • The statements between While~WhileEnd are repeated as long as the condition is true. When t[...]

  • Page 672

    20060301 ClrGraph Syntax: ClrGraph Function: Clears the Graph window and returns View Window parameters to their initial default settings. Cl s Syntax: Cls Function: Clears sketch elements (lines and other figures sketched on the Graph window), and graphs drawn using drag and drop. Di s pFT able Syntax: DispFTable Function: Creates and displays a f[...]

  • Page 673

    20060301 DrawGraph Syntax: DrawGraph : [<expression>] Function: Graphs the selected expression or an expression specified as a parameter. De s cription: <expression> has a y = type expression on the right side. Graphing of any other type of expression is not supported by this command. Example: DrawGraph: Graphs the currently selected ex[...]

  • Page 674

    20060301 GTSelOn Syntax: GTSelOn : <graph number> Function: Selects a graph expression. De s cription: Graph number range: 1 to 100 Horizontal Syntax: Horizontal : <y -coordinate> Function: Draws a horizontal line. In ver s e Syntax: Inverse : < y or x graph number> Function: Graphs the inverse of a function. De s cription: Graph [...]

  • Page 675

    20060301 PlotOff Syntax: PlotOff : < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate> Function: Turns off display of the plot at the specified coordinates. PlotOn Syntax: PlotOn : < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate> Function: Turns on display of the plot at the specified coordinates. plotT e s t( Syntax: plotTest(< x -coordinate>, <[...]

  • Page 676

    20060301 PTThick Syntax: PTThick : <graph number> Function: Specifies “Thick” ( ) as the graph line type. De s cription: Graph number range: 1 to 100 PxlChg Syntax: PxlChg : < x -dot>, < y -dot> Function: Toggles display of the specified pixel on and off. Example: PxlChg 5,1 PxlOff Syntax: PxlOff : < x -dot>, < y -dot[...]

  • Page 677

    20060301 RclVWin Syntax: RclVWin : <variable name> Function: Recalls View Window values, which were previously saved under the specified name. Example: RclVWin WIN1 SheetActive Syntax: SheetActive : h { <sheet number> } "<sheet name>" Function: Selects the sheet that contains the expression to be graphed. De s cription: [...]

  • Page 678

    20060301 StoPict Syntax: StoPict : <picture name> Function: Assigns a name to a Pict image and stores it. Example: StoPict Pict1 StoVWin Syntax: StoVWin : <variable name> Function: Assigns a name to View Window values and stores them. Example: StoVWin VWIN1 T angentLine Syntax: TangentLine : <graph number>, < x -coordinate> [...]

  • Page 679

    20060301 ViewWindo w Syntax1: ViewWindow :h LogP : { x y xy } , [xmin value], [xmax value], [xscale value], [ymin value], [ymax value], [yscale value], [t θ  min value], [t θ  max value], [t θ  step value] Syntax 2: ViewWindow CallUndef Syntax 3: ViewWindow Function: Syntax 1: Specifies View Window values. Syntax 2: Makes all View Windo[...]

  • Page 680

    20060301 I 3D ClearSheet3D Syntax: ClearSheet3D : { <sheet number> } "<sheet name>" Function: Deletes the sheet name and expressions on the sheet, and returns its settings to their default values. Omitting the argument causes all sheets to be cleared. Draw3D Syntax: Draw3D Function: Draws a 3D graph using current settings. Sel[...]

  • Page 681

    20060301 I Conic s DrawConic s Syntax: DrawConics Function: Draws a conics graph based on the data registered on the Conics Editor window. I Sequence Di s pDfrTbl Syntax: DispDfrTbl Function: Creates and displays an arithmetic sequence table. Di s pDQTbl Syntax: DispDQTbl Function: Creates and displays a progression of difference table. Di s pFibTb[...]

  • Page 682

    20060301 DrawSeqCon, DrawSeqPlt Syntax: DrawSeqCon DrawSeqPlt Function: Graphs a recursion expression whose vertical axis is a n ( b n or c n ) and whose horizontal axis is n using a generated number table, in accordance with the conditions of each command. De s cription: DrawSeqCon draws a connect type graph, while Dra wSeqPlt draws a plot type gr[...]

  • Page 683

    20060301 SeqSelOn Syntax: SeqSelOn : a n +1 a n +2 b n +1 b n +2 c n +1 c n +2 a n E b n E c n E Function: Selects the specified sequence expression. Specifying “ a n E”, “ b n E”, or “ c n E” as the argument activates [Explicit]. Specifying any other argument activates [Recursive]. SeqT ype Syntax: SeqType :h " n " h " a[...]

  • Page 684

    20060301 DefaultLi s tEditor Syntax: DefaultListEditor Function: Initializes the sort sequence and display contents of the list on the Stat Editor window (list1 to list6). Di s pLi s tEditor Syntax: DispListEditor Function: Displays the Stat Editor window. Di s pStat Syntax: DispStat Function: Displays previous statistical calculation results. Draw[...]

  • Page 685

    20060301 LinearReg Syntax: LinearReg : x List, y List[,[FreqList (or 1)][, [< yn >][, { On Off } ]]] Function: Performs y = a  x + b regression. De s cription x List: Name of list for storing x -axis data y List: Name of list for storing y -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ x List” and “ y List” data • ?[...]

  • Page 686

    20060301 MultiSortA Syntax 1: MultiSortA : <list name> Syntax 2: MultiSortA : <base list name>, <subordinate list name>, <subordinate list name>, ... Function: Sorts a statistical list in ascending order. De s cription • Syntax 1 performs a simple list sort. • Syntax 2 sorts multiple lists on the base list. Up to five su[...]

  • Page 687

    20060301 QuadReg Syntax: QuadReg : x List, y List[,[FreqList (or 1)][,[< yn >][, { On Off } ]]] Function: Performs y = a  x 2 + b  x + c regression. De s cription x List: Name of list for storing x -axis data y List: Name of list for storing y -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ x List” and “ y List” dat[...]

  • Page 688

    20060301 StatGraph Syntax 1: StatGraph : <StatGraph number 1 to 9>, { On Off } , Graph Type 1, x List, y List, FreqList (or 1), Plot Type Syntax 2: StatGraph : <StatGraph number 1 to 9>, { On Off } , Graph Type 2, x List, y List, FreqList (or 1) Syntax 3: StatGraph : <StatGraph number 1 to 9>, { On Off } , Graph Type 3, x List, y [...]

  • Page 689

    20060301 12-6-33 Program Command Ref erence I Setup DefaultSetup Syntax: DefaultSetup Function: Initializes all setup data settings. SetAxe s Syntax: SetAxes : { On Number Off } Function: Turns display of Graph window axes on or off. SetAxe s 3D Syntax: SetAxes3D :h { On Off Box } Function: Turns display of axes on (normal), off, or Box (box type c[...]

  • Page 690

    20060301 SetCoord Syntax: SetCoord : { On Off } Function: Turns display of Graph window pointer coordinates on or off. SetCoordOff3D Syntax: SetCoordOff3D Function: Turns off display of pointer coordinates for 3D graphing. SetCoordP ol3D Syntax: SetCoordPol3D Function: Specifies use of polar coordinates for coordinate display during 3D graphing. Se[...]

  • Page 691

    20060301 SetDi s pGCon Syntax: SetDispGCon : { On Off } Function: Turns display of graph controller arrows during graphing on or off. SetDrawCon Syntax: SetDrawCon Function: Specifies graphing by connecting plotting points with lines. SetDrawPlt Syntax: SetDrawPlt Function: Specifies graphing by plotting points only. SetFix Syntax: SetFix : <int[...]

  • Page 692

    20060301 SetLabel3D Syntax: SetLabel3D :h { On Off } Function: Turns display of Graph window axis labels for 3D graphing on or off. SetLeadCur s or Syntax: SetLeadCursor : { On Off } Function: Turns display of the leading cursor during graphing on or off. SetNormal Syntax: SetNormal : { 1 } 2 Function: Specifies Normal 1 or Normal 2 as the auto exp[...]

  • Page 693

    20060301 SetSequence Syntax: SetSequence : { On Off StepDisp } Function: Turns display of expressions created after graphing on or off or specifies “step display” ( StepDi s p ). De s cription: When StepDi s p is selected, the expression does not appear until you press  . SetSimulGraph Syntax: SetSimulGraph : { On Off } Function: Turn simult[...]

  • Page 694

    20060301 SetTV ariable Syntax: SetTVariable : { <list name> } TableInput Function: Specifies the variable reference location for table generation. De s cription: Use T ableInput to specify a range and generate a table. Set 3 di s p Syntax: Set 3 disp : { On Off } Function: Turns display of subtotals for tables on or off. I Folder/V ariable Cl[...]

  • Page 695

    20060301 DelFolder Syntax: DelFolder : <folder name> Function: Deletes a folder. DelV ar Syntax: DelVar : <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Deletes a variable. De s cription: Deletes all variables, regardless of type (program, etc.), that have the specified variable name. See GetT ype for information about variable ty[...]

  • Page 696

    20060301 Local Syntax: Local : <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Defines a local variable. De s cription The following are the merits of local variables. • Since local variables are deleted automatically, use of local variables for temporary storage avoids unnecessary use of available memory. • Since local variables do [...]

  • Page 697

    20060301 SetFolder Syntax: SetFolder : <folder name> [,<storage variable name>] Function • Makes the specified folder the current folder. Including a variable name at the end of this command assigns the name of the previous current folder to the variable as a text string. • If the specified folder does not exist, this command create[...]

  • Page 698

    20060301 ExpT oStr Syntax: ExpToStr : <expression>,<storage variable name> Function: Converts the result of an input expression to a string and assigns the string to the specified variable. NumT oChr Syntax: NumToChr : n ,<storage variable name> Function: Converts numeric value n to the corresponding text character(s) in accordanc[...]

  • Page 699

    20060301 StrJoin Syntax: StrJoin : "<string 1>", "<string 2>", <storage variable name> Function: Joins "<string 1>" and "<string 2>" and then assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. StrLeft Syntax: StrLeft : "<string>", n , <storage variable nam[...]

  • Page 700

    20060301 StrRotate Syntax: StrRotate : "<string>", <storage variable name> [, n ] Function: Rotates the left side part and right side part of a string at the n th character, and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. De s cription: Rotation is to the left when “ n ” is positive, and to the right when “ n[...]

  • Page 701

    20060301 I Other Clo s eComP or t38k Syntax: CloseComPort38k Function: Closes the 3-pin COM port. Example: See the GetV ar38k command. GetV ar38k Syntax: GetVar38k : <variable name> Function: Receives variable names and variable contents. De s cription • The OpenComP or t38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The [...]

  • Page 702

    20060301 OpenComP or t38k Syntax: OpenComPort38k Function: Opens the 3-pin COM port. Example: See the GetV ar38k command on page 12-6-45. Receive38k Syntax: Receive38k : <variable name> Function: Receives EA-200 data. De s cription • The OpenComP or t38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The Clo s eComP or t38k c[...]

  • Page 703

    20060301 12-7 Inc luding Cla ss P ad Function s in Pr ogram s Inc luding Graphing Function s in a Program Graphing functions let your program graph multiple equations, or overlay multiple graphs on the same screen. Example: DefaultSetup ClrGraph ViewWindow 0, 7.7, 1, –14, 110, 10 GraphType "y=" Define y1(x) = x^4 – x^3 – 24x^2 + 4x [...]

  • Page 704

    20060301 Inc luding 3D Graphing Function s in a Program The methods for using 3D graphing functions in a program are identical to those for normal (non-3D) graphing functions, except that you can only graph one 3D graph at a time. For information about commands that are unique to 3D graphing, see “3D” on page 12-6-24. Inc luding T able & Gr[...]

  • Page 705

    20060301 12-7-3 Including ClassP ad Functions in Programs Inc luding Recur s ion T able and Recur s ion Graph Function s in a Pr ogram Recursion table and recursion graph functions can be included in a program to generate number tables and draw graphs. Example: DefaultSetup ViewWindow 0, 6, 1, – 0.01, 0.3, 1 SeqType "a n+1 a 0 " "?[...]

  • Page 706

    20060301 12-7-4 Including ClassP ad Functions in Programs Inc luding Stati s tical Graphing and Calculation Function s in a Program Including statistical graphs and calculation functions in a program allows the program to draw statistical graphs and display statistical calculation results. S T o perform s tati s tical graphing Example 1: Scatter Di[...]

  • Page 707

    20060301 S To u s e s tati s tical calculation function s You can perform the following types of statistical calculations using program commands. • Single-variable statistics • Paired-variable statistics • Regression • Tests • Confidence interval • Probability See “Chapter 7 – Using the Statistics Application” for more information[...]

  • Page 708

    20090601 Chapter 13 U s ing the Spread s heet Application The Spreadsheet application provides you with powerful, take- along-anywhere spreadsheet capabilities on your ClassPad. 13-1 Spread s heet Application Overview 13-2 Spread s heet Application Menu s and Button s 13-3 Ba s ic Spread s heet Window Operation s 13-4 Editing Cell Content s 13-5 U [...]

  • Page 709

    20090601 13-1-1 Spreadsheet Application Ov er view 13-1 Spread s heet Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Spreadsheet application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Star ting Up the Spread s heet Application Use the following procedure to start up the Spreadsheet application. S Cla [...]

  • Page 710

    20060301 13-2-1 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons 13-2 Spread s heet Application Menu s and Button s This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Spreadsheet application window. • For information about the menu, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I File Menu T o do thi s : Select thi s [File[...]

  • Page 711

    20090601 13-2-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons I Edit Menu T o do thi s : Select thi s [Edit] menu item: Undo the last action, or redo the action you have just undone Undo/Redo Display a dialog box that lets you show or hide scrollbars, and specify the direction the cursor advances when inputting data Options Automatically resize columns[...]

  • Page 712

    20090601 I Spread s heet T oolbar Button s Not all of the Spreadsheet buttons can fit on a single toolbar, tap the 5 / 4 button on the far right to toggle between the two toolbars. T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Toggle the selected cell(s) between decimal (floating point) and exact display* 1 - / + Toggle the selected cell(s) between bold and no[...]

  • Page 713

    20090601 13-3-1 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations 13-3 Ba s ic Spread s heet Windo w Operation s This section contains information about how to control the appearance of the Spreadsheet window, and how to perform other basic operations. About the Cell Cur s or The cell cursor causes the current selected cell or group of cells to become highlighte[...]

  • Page 714

    20060301 13-3-2 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations (2) On the dialog box that appears, tap the [Cursor Movement] down arrow button, and then select the setting you want. T o have the cell cur s or beha ve thi s way when y ou regi s ter input: Select thi s s etting: Remain at the current cell Off Move to the next row below the current cell Down Mov[...]

  • Page 715

    20090601 13-3-3 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations I J umping to a Cell You can use the following procedure to jump to a specific cell on the Spreadsheet screen by specifying the cell’s column and row. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the [Edit] menu, select [Goto Cell]. (2) On the dialog box that appears, type in a letter to specify the column of[...]

  • Page 716

    20090601 13-3-4 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Hiding or Di s pla ying the Scrollbar s Use the following procedure to turn display of Spreadsheet scrollbars on and off. By turning off the scrollbars, you make it possible to view more information in the spreadsheet. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Options]. (2) On the dialo[...]

  • Page 717

    20090601 13-3-5 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Tap a row heading to select the row. Tap a column heading to select the column. Tap a cell to select it. Tap here to select the entire spreadsheet. Selecting Cell s Before performing any operation on a cell, you must first select it. You can select a single cell, a range of cells, all the cells in[...]

  • Page 718

    20060301 13-3-6 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations U s ing the Cell Viewer Window The Cell Viewer window lets you view both the formula contained in a cell, as well as the current value produced by the formula. While the Cell Viewer window is displayed, you can select or clear its check boxes to toggle display of the value and/or formula on or off[...]

  • Page 719

    20090601 13-4-1 Editing Cell Contents 13-4 Editing Cell Content s This section explains how to enter the edit mode for data input and editing, and how to input various types of data and expressions into cells. Edit Mode Screen The Spreadsheet application automatically enters the edit mode whenever you tap a cell to select it and input something fro[...]

  • Page 720

    20090601 • You can tap the data input toolbar buttons to input letters and symbols into the edit box. Entering the Edit Mode There are two ways you can enter the edit mode: • Tapping a cell and then tapping inside the edit box • Tapping a cell and inputting something on the keypad The following explains the difference between these two techni[...]

  • Page 721

    20090601 I Tapping a cell and then inputting s omething from the keypad • This enters the “quick” edit mode, indicated by a dashed blinking cursor. Anything you input with the keypad will be displayed in the edit box. • If the cell you selected already contains something, anything you input with the quick edit mode replaces the existing con[...]

  • Page 722

    20090601 Inputting a Formula A formula is an expression that the Spreadsheet application calculates and evaluates when you input it, when data related to the formula is changed, etc. A formula always starts with an equal sign (=), and can contain any one of the following. • Values • Mathematical expressions • Cell references • ClassPad soft[...]

  • Page 723

    20090601 (3) Press . to display the soft keyboard. (4) Tap the  tab and then tap P , M , U , then press  , or on the [Calc] menu, tap [row]. (5) Tap cell A1, and then press  . (6) Press  . (7) Tap cell B1 and then press  . (8) On the soft keyboard, tap the  tab, tap  , and then tap  . (9) Tap cell A1, press  , 7 ,  , ?[...]

  • Page 724

    20090601 (15) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Paste]. • Learn more about cell referencing below. Inputting a Cell Reference A cell reference is a symbol that references the value of one cell for use by another cell. If you input “=A1 + B1” into cell C2, for example, the Spreadsheet will add the current value of cell A1 to the current value of cell B[...]

  • Page 725

    20090601 I Ab s olute Cell Reference s An absolute cell reference is the one that does not change, regardless of where it is located or where it is copied to or moved to. You can make both the row and column of a cell reference absolute, or you can make only the row or only the column of a cell reference absolute, as described below. Thi s cell ref[...]

  • Page 726

    20060301 A constant is data whose value is defined when it is input. When you input something into a cell for which text is specified as the data type without an equal sign (=) at the beginning, a numeric value is treated as a constant and non-numeric values are treated as text. Note the following examples for cells of U type: Thi s input: I s inte[...]

  • Page 727

    20060301 13-4-9 Editing Cell Contents U s ing the Fill Sequence Command The Fill Sequence command lets you set up an expression with a variable, and input a range of values based on the calculated results of the expression. S To input a range of value s u s ing Fill Sequence Example: To configure a Fill Sequence operation according to the following[...]

  • Page 728

    20090601 • The following shows how the Fill Sequence dialog box should appear after configuring the parameters for our example. 13-4-10 Editing Cell Contents (3) After everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. • This performs all the required calculations according to your settings, and inserts the results into the spreadsheet. • The followin[...]

  • Page 729

    20060301 Cut and Copy You can use the [Cut] and [Copy] commands on the Spreadsheet application [Edit] menu to cut and copy the contents of the cells currently selected (highlighted) with the cell cursor. You can also cut and copy text from the edit box. The following types of cut/copy operations are supported. • Single cell cut/copy • Multiple-[...]

  • Page 730

    20090601 • The following shows how cell data is converted to a matrix format when pasted into the edit box. 13-4-12 Editing Cell Contents Select the cell where you want to insert the text (A6 in this example), and then tap inside the edit box. Tap [Edit], and then [Paste]. To view the matrix as text, tap the cell (A6) and then @ . To view the mat[...]

  • Page 731

    20060301 13-4-13 Editing Cell Contents Specifying Text or Calculation a s the Data Type for a Particular Cell A simple toolbar button operation lets you specify that the data contained in the currently selected cell or cells should be treated as either text or calculation data. The following shows how the specified data type affects how a calculati[...]

  • Page 732

    20090601 U s ing Drag and Drop to Copy Cell Data within a Spread s heet You can also copy data from one cell to another within a spreadsheet using drag and drop. If the destination cell already contains data, it is replaced with the newly dropped data. • When performing this operation, you can drag and drop between cells, or from one location to [...]

  • Page 733

    20090601 13-4-15 Editing Cell Contents Selection boundary (cursor held against C2) I Dragging and Dropping Multiple Cell s • When dragging multiple cells, only the cell where the stylus is located has a selection boundary around it. Selection boundary dropped here (A8) • When you release the stylus from the screen, the top left cell of the grou[...]

  • Page 734

    20090601 13-4-16 Editing Cell Contents S To drag and drop within the edit box (1) Select the cell whose contents you want to edit. (2) Tap the edit box to enter the edit mode. (3) Tap the edit box again to display the editing cursor (a solid blinking cursor). (4) Drag the stylus across the characters you want to move, so they are highlighted. (5) H[...]

  • Page 735

    20090601 S To u s e drag and drop to obtain the data point s of a graph Example: To obtain the data points of the bar graph shown below 13-4-17 Editing Cell Contents (1) Input data and draw a bar graph. • See “Other Graph Window Operations” on page 13-9-16 for more information on graphing. (2) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (3) Tap t[...]

  • Page 736

    20090601 Example: To assign values to variables and recalculate expressions that contain them. The following procedure shows the recalculate operation while the Spreadsheet application is being accessed from the Main application. S Cla ss Pad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap  . This starts the Main application and displays the work are[...]

  • Page 737

    20090601 (4) On the Main application window, use the following operation to assign values to the variables.  @AB 6?   CDE 6@  (5) On the Spreadsheet window, tap cell A1 and input =a+b. Next, tap cell A2 and input =a s b. When you input the above expressions, the results will appear dynamically in cells A1 and A2. 13-4-19 Editing C[...]

  • Page 738

    20090601 (6) On the Main application window, assign different values to the variables. Here, assign 789 to variable b as shown below.  FGH 6@  (7) Tap the Spreadsheet application window to make it active. On the [File] menu, tap [Recalculate]. This recalculates the expressions in the Spreadsheet window and displays their results. 13-4-20 E[...]

  • Page 739

    20060301 13-4-21 Editing Cell Contents Importing and Exporting Variable Value s You can use the procedures in this section to import the data currently assigned to a variable into a spreadsheet, and to export data in a spreadsheet to a variable. I Importing data a ss igned to a variable into a s pread s heet You can import the data assigned to a va[...]

  • Page 740

    20090601 13-4-22 Editing Cell Contents (4) After confirming that everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. • This will input the data assigned to the NData variable (in this case, 1234567890) into spreadsheet cell A1 as shown here. S To import the data a ss igned to a LIST variable Example: To import the list data {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} assigned to the [...]

  • Page 741

    20090601 13-4-23 Editing Cell Contents S To import the data a ss igned to a MAT variable Example: To import the matrix data        assigned to the MData variable at cell A1 (1) Tap cell A1 to select it. (2) On the [File] menu, tap [Import]. • This displays the Import dialog box along with a soft keyboard. (3) Type the variable name (i[...]

  • Page 742

    20090601 13-4-24 Editing Cell Contents I Exporting Spread s heet Data to a Variable You can use the procedures in this section to export the data contained in a specific cell or range of cells in the spreadsheet that is currently open on the ClassPad display. Export of spreadsheet data to the variables of the following data types is supported: LIST[...]

  • Page 743

    20090601 13-4-25 Editing Cell Contents S To export s pread s heet data to a MAT (Matrix) variable (1) Select the range of cells that contains the data you want to export to a Mat variable. (2) On the [File] menu, tap [Export]. This displays the Export dialog box along with a soft keyboard. (3) Tap the [Type] box down arrow button, and then select ?[...]

  • Page 744

    20060301 13-4-26 Editing Cell Contents Searching for Data in a Spread s heet The Search command helps you locate specific data in a spreadsheet quickly and easily. I Search Dialog Box The Search command can be executed either by tapping [Search] on the [Edit] menu or by tapping the d button on the toolbar. Executing the Search command displays a se[...]

  • Page 745

    20090601 13-4-27 Editing Cell Contents I Search Example s Example 1: To search for the letter “a”, regardless of case S Cla ss Pad Operation (1) Display the spreadsheet you want to search. • This example is based on a spreadsheet that contains the data shown below. (2) Tap [Search] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar d button. • This disp[...]

  • Page 746

    20090601 13-4-28 Editing Cell Contents (5) To search for the next instance of the search string, tap [Search Again] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar q button. • Each time you tap the [Search Again] command or the q toolbar button, the search will jump to the next cell that contains the specified search string. • The message “Search Strin[...]

  • Page 747

    20090601 13-4-29 Editing Cell Contents (4) Tap [OK]. • This will start the search and the cursor will jump to the first cell found that contains a match for the search string. (5) To search for the next instance of the search string, tap [Search Again] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar q button. • Each time you tap the [Search Again] comman[...]

  • Page 748

    20090601 13-4-30 Editing Cell Contents (3) Tap the [Key Column] box down arrow button. On the list that appears, select the column you want the sort to be based upon. (4) Tap either [Ascending] (a, b, c...) or [Descending] (z, y, x...). (5) After confirming that everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. • This will execute the sort and rearrange [...]

  • Page 749

    20090601 13-5-1 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application 13-5 U s ing the Spread s heet Application with the eActivity Application You can display the Spreadsheet application from within the eActivity application. This makes it possible to drag data between the Spreadsheet and eActivity windows as desired. Drag and Dr op Aft[...]

  • Page 750

    20090601 13-5-2 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application (4) Select the cell you want and drag it to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the contents of the cell in the eActivity window. • You can also select something in the edit box and drag it to the eActivity window. If you do, the edit b[...]

  • Page 751

    20060301 13-5-3 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application (5) Drag the contents of the edit box to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the contents of the edit box in the eActivity window as a text string. (6) You can now experiment with the data in the eActivity window. • The basic operations[...]

  • Page 752

    20090601 Example 4: Dragging data from eActivity to the Spreadsheet window 13-5-4 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application[...]

  • Page 753

    20090601 13-6-1 Statistical Calculations 13-6 Stati s tical Calculation s The upper part of the [Calc] menu includes the same menu items as the Statistics Application [Calc] menu. Spreadsheet Application Statistics Application Menu items with the same name perform the same functions, but there are some differences between the Statistics Application[...]

  • Page 754

    20090601 Example: To execute paired-variable calculations and display a list of statistical values (1) Enter the paired-variable data into the spreadsheet, and then select the range of cells where it is located. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Two-Variable]. • For details about the meaning of each value that appears as a statistical cal[...]

  • Page 755

    20090601 S T o pa s te a li s t of regre ss ion calculation re s ult s into a s pread s heet (1) Perform the procedure under “To perform a regression calculation” and display the regression calculation result window. (2) On the regression calculation result window, tap the [Output>>] button. (3) On the output window, tap [Paste]. • This[...]

  • Page 756

    20090601 (4) Tap [Next >>]. • This will display a screen with the variable assignments for the range you selected in step 1 of this procedure entered automatically in the input fields as the initial defaults. (5) Enter values for the other variables and then tap [Next >>]. • This displays the calculation results. If there are multip[...]

  • Page 757

    20090601 13-7 Cell and Li s t Calculation s Use the [Calc] menu to perform cell and list calculations. The [Calc] menu provides access to a [Cell-Calculation] submenu for cell calculations and a [List-Calculation] submenu for list calculations. Spread s heet [Li s t-Calculation] Submenu Ba s ic s The menu items on the [List-Calculation] submenu are[...]

  • Page 758

    20090601 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) With the stylus, tap the cell where you want the result to appear. • In this example, we would tap cell A1. (2) On the [ Calc] menu, tap [List-Calculation] and then [sum] on the submenu. • This inputs the sum function ([sum(]) into the edit box. (3) Use the stylus to drag across the range of data cells from [...]

  • Page 759

    20090601 (4) Tap the r button to the right of the edit box. • This automatically closes the parentheses, calculates the sum of the values in the selected range, and displays the result in cell A1. • You could skip this step and input the closing parentheses by pressing the  key on the keypad, if you want. (5) Tap the edit box to activate it [...]

  • Page 760

    20090601 Cell Calculation and Li s t Calculation Function s This section provides explanations of the functions, input syntax, and examples for each of the cell calculation and list calculation functions included on the [Calc] menu. Please note that “start cell:end cell” is equivalent to entering a list. S Cell-Calculation - r ow Function: Retu[...]

  • Page 761

    20090601 S Cell-Calculation - count Function: Returns a count of the number of cells in the specified range. Syntax: count(start cell[:end cell]) Example: To count the number of cells in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: 13-7-5 Cell and List Calculatio[...]

  • Page 762

    20090601 S Cell-Calculation - cellif Function: Evaluates an equality or inequality, and returns one of three different expressions based on whether the equality/inequality is true (expression 1), false (expression 2), or inconclusive (expression 3). With this function, the equality/inequality can include a string as in the following example: cellif[...]

  • Page 763

    20090601 S Li s t-Calculation - min Function: Returns the lowest value contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: min(start cell[:end cell][,start cell[:end cell]] / [,value]) Example: To determine the lowest value in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in c[...]

  • Page 764

    20090601 S mean Function: Returns the mean of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: mean(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the mean of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: S median Funct[...]

  • Page 765

    20090601 S mode Function: Returns the mode of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: mode(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the mode of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: S Q 1 Function[...]

  • Page 766

    20090601 S Q 3 Function: Returns the third quartile of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: Q 3 (start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the third quartile of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell[...]

  • Page 767

    20090601 S s tdDev Function: Returns the sample standard deviation of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: stdDev(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the sample standard deviation of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result i[...]

  • Page 768

    20090601 S Li s t-Calculation - s um Function: Returns the sum of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: sum(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the sum of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell [...]

  • Page 769

    20090601 S Li s t-Calculation - cuml Function: Returns the cumulative sums of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: cuml(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the cumulative sums of the values in cells B1 through B3, and input the result in cell A1: S Li s t-Calculation - li s t Function: Returns the differences between[...]

  • Page 770

    20090601 S Li s t-Calculation - per cent Function: Returns the percentage of each value in the range of specified cells, the sum of which is 100%. Syntax: percent(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the percentage of the values in cells B1 through B4, and input the result in cell A1: S Li s t-Calculation - polyEv al Function: Returns a polyn[...]

  • Page 771

    20090601 • “ x ” is the default variable when you do not specify one above. • To specify “ y ” as the variable, for example, enter “=polyEval(B1:B3, y )”. S Li s t-Calculation - s equence Function: Returns the lowest-degree polynomial that generates the sequence expressed by the values in a list or range of specified cells. If we ev[...]

  • Page 772

    20090601 S Li s t-Calculation - s umSeq Function: Determines the lowest-degree polynomial that generates the sum of the first n terms of your sequence. If we evaluate the resulting polynomial at 1, for example, the result will be the first value in your list. If we evaluate the resulting polynomial at 2, the result will be the sum of the first two [...]

  • Page 773

    20090601 13-8-1 F or matting Cells and Data 13-8 Formatting Cell s and Data This section explains how to control the format of the spreadsheet and the data contained in the cells. Standar d (Fractional) and Decimal (Appro ximate) Mode s You can use the following procedure to control whether a specific cell, row, or column, or the entire spreadsheet[...]

  • Page 774

    20090601 T ext Alignment With the following procedure, you can specify justified, align left, center, or align right for a specific cell, row, or column, or the entire spreadsheet. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Select the cell(s) whose alignment setting you want to specify. • See “Selecting Cells” on page 13-3-5 for information about selecting[...]

  • Page 775

    20090601 Changing the Width of a Column There are three different methods you can use to control the width of a column: dragging with the stylus, using the [Column Width] command, or using the [AutoFit Selection] command. S T o change the width of a column u s ing the s tylu s Use the stylus to drag the edge of a column header left or right until i[...]

  • Page 776

    20090601 (3) On the dialog box that appears, enter a value in the [Width] box to specify the desired width of the column in pixels. • You can also use the [Range] box to specify a different column from the one you selected in step (1) above, or a range of columns. Entering B1:D1 in the [Range] box, for example, will change columns B, C, and D to [...]

  • Page 777

    20090601 (3) On the [Edit] menu, tap [AutoFit Selection]. • This causes the column width to be adjusted automatically so the entire value can be displayed. • Note that [AutoFit Selection] also will reduce the width of a column, if applicable. The following shows what happens when [AutoFit Selection] is executed while a cell that contains a sing[...]

  • Page 778

    20090601 13-9-1 Graphing 13-9 Graphing The Spreadsheet application lets you draw a variety of different graphs for analyzing data. You can combine line and column graphs, and the interactive editing feature lets you change a graph by dragging its points on the display. Graph Menu After selecting data on the spreadsheet, use the [Graph] menu to sele[...]

  • Page 779

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Line] - [Clu s tered] ( C ) S [Graph] - [Line] - [Stac ked] ( E ) 13-9-2 Graphing[...]

  • Page 780

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Line] - [100% Stac ked] ( F ) S [Graph] - [Column] - [Clu s tered] ( G ) 13-9-3 Graphing[...]

  • Page 781

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Column] - [Stac ked] ( I ) S [Graph] - [Column] - [100% Stac ked] ( J ) 13-9-4 Graphing[...]

  • Page 782

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Bar] - [Clu s tered] ( K ) S [Graph] - [Bar] - [Stac ked] ( 9 ) 13-9-5 Graphing[...]

  • Page 783

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Bar] - [100% Stac ked] ( ! ) S [Graph] - [Pie] ( Y ) • When you select a pie chart, only the first series (row or column) of the selected data is used. • Tapping any of the sections of a pie graph causes three values to appear at the bottom of the screen: the cell location, a data value for the section, and a percent value[...]

  • Page 784

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Scatter] ( W ) • In the case of a scatter graph, the first series (column or row) of selected values is used as the x -values for all plots. The other selected values are used as the y -value for each of the plots. This means if you select four columns of data (like Columns A, B, C, and D), for example, there will be three d[...]

  • Page 785

    20090601 • Tapping any of the bins of a histogram graph causes three values to appear at the bottom of the screen. The first two values (from the left) indicate the range of the selected bin, while the third value indicates the quantity of the selected bin. • You can specify the bin width after drawing a histogram graph. On the Graph window tha[...]

  • Page 786

    20090601 • Tapping the Q1, Q3, Med, Min, or Max location of a box whisker graph will cause the applicable value to appear at the bottom of the screen. • On the Graph window, checking [Calc] - [Show Outliers] displays outliers instead of whiskers on graph. • Dragging a box whisker graph to a cell in the spreadsheet window will create a table c[...]

  • Page 787

    20090601 S [Graph] - [Row Serie s ] Selecting this option treats each row as a set of data. The value in each column is plotted as a vertical axis value. The following shows a graph of the same data as the above example, except this time [Row Series] is selected. S [Graph] - [Column Serie s ] Selecting this option treats each column as a separate s[...]

  • Page 788

    20090601 Graph Window Menu s and T oolbar The following describes the special menus and toolbar that appears whenever the Spreadsheet application Graph window is on the display. I Menu • See “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I Edit Menu • See “Edit Menu” on page 13-2-2. I View Menu Many of the [View] menu commands can also be executed by [...]

  • Page 789

    20090601 I T ype Menu • The [Type] menu is identical to the [Graph] menu described on page 13-9-1. I Calc Menu T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s [Calc] menu item: Display a linear regression curve c Linear Reg Display a Med-Med graph  MedMed Line Display a quadratic regression curve e Quadratic Reg Display a cubic regression c[...]

  • Page 790

    20090601 Ba s ic Graphing Step s The following are the basic steps for graphing spreadsheet data. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Input the data you want to graph into the spreadsheet. (2) Use the [Graph] menu to specify whether you want to graph the data by row or by column. T o do thi s : Select thi s [Graph] menu option: Graph the data by row Row Se[...]

  • Page 791

    20090601 (4) On the [Graph] menu, select the type of graph you want to draw. Or you can tap the applicable icon on the toolbar. • This draws the selected graph. See “Graph Menu” on page 13-9-1 for examples of the different types of graphs that are available. • You can change to another type of graph at any time by selecting the graph type y[...]

  • Page 792

    20090601 Regre ss ion Graph Operation s After plotting a scatter graph of paired-variable spreadsheet data (Single-variable and Paired-variable Statistical Calculations, page 13-6-1), you can draw a regression graph that approximates the scatter graph and determine the regression formula. S T o plot a s catter graph and then draw it s regre ss ion [...]

  • Page 793

    20090601 Other Graph Window Operation s This section provides more details about the types of operations you can perform while the Graph window is on the display. S To s how or hide line s and marker s (1) While a line graph or a scatter graph is on the Graph window, tap the [View] menu. Lines and markers both turned on (2) Tap the [Markers] or [Li[...]

  • Page 794

    20090601 S T o change a line in a c lu s tered line graph to a column graph (1) Draw the clustered line graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any data point on the line you wish to change to a column graph. (3) On the [ Calc] menu, tap [Column]. • You could also tap the down arrow button next to the third tool button from the left, and then tap & .[...]

  • Page 795

    20090601 S T o change a column in a c lu s tered column graph to a line (1) Draw the clustered column graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any one of the columns you wish to change to a line graph. (3) On the [ Calc] menu, tap [Line]. • You could also tap the down arrow button next to the third tool button from the left, and then tap y . • You can c[...]

  • Page 796

    20090601 S T o find out the per centage of data for eac h pie graph s ection (1) While the display is split between the pie graph and the Spreadsheet windows, tap the pie graph to select it. (2) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Copy]. (3) Tap the Spreadsheet window to make it active. (4) Tap the cell where you want to paste the data. • The cell you tap w[...]

  • Page 797

    20090601 S T o change the appearance of the axe s While a graph is on the Graph window, select [Toggle Axes] on the [View] menu or tap the Q toolbar button to cycle through axes settings in the following sequence: axes on m axes and values on m axes and values off m . S T o change the appearance of a graph b y dragging a point While a graph is on t[...]

  • Page 798

    20090601 • If a regression curve is displayed for the data whose graph is being changed by dragging, the regression curve also changes automatically in accordance with the drag changes. • When you edit data in the spreadsheet and press  , your graph will update automatically. Impor tant! • You can drag a point only if it corresponds to a f[...]

  • Page 799

    20060301 Chapter 14 U s ing the Diff erential Equation Graph Application This chapter explains how to use the Differential Equation Graph application, which you can use to investigate families of solutions to ordinary differential equations (ODE). 14-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overvie w 14-2 Graphing a Fir s t Or der Differential Equ[...]

  • Page 800

    20060301 14-1-1 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view 14-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview This section explains how to use the Differential Equation Graph application screen, and describes the basic configuration of the Differential Equation Graph application windows. Differential Equation Graph Application Feature s[...]

  • Page 801

    20060301 14-1-2 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view Differential Equation Graph Application Window The Differential Equation Graph application has two windows, which are described below. Differential Equation Editor window Use this window to input expressions and initial conditions for graphing. Differential Equation Graph window Th[...]

  • Page 802

    20060301 14-1-3 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view I Differential Equation Editor Window Screen s The Differential Equation Editor window has three different editor screens. The editor screen you should use depends on what you want to input, as described below. T o input thi s : T ap thi s tab: T o di s play thi s editor s creen: D[...]

  • Page 803

    20060301 14-1-4 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view Differential Equation Editor Window Men u s and Button s This section provides basic information about Differential Equation Editor window menus and commands. • For information about the menu, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. Edit Menu ([DiffEq], [IC], [Graph s ]) T o do t[...]

  • Page 804

    20060301 14-1-5 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view T oolbar Button s ([DiffEq], [IC], [Graph s ]) T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Graph the selected function(s)  Display the View Window dialog box to configure Differential Equation Graph window settings  Display the Main application window ^ Delete the line of data at the c[...]

  • Page 805

    20060301 14-1-6 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view Differential Equation Graph Window Men u s and Button s This section provides basic information about Differential Equation Graph window menus and commands. Edit Menu T o do thi s : Select thi s Edit menu item: Toggle arrows to indicate the direction of slope field or phase plane v[...]

  • Page 806

    20060301 14-1-7 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view Analy s i s Men u T o do thi s : Select thi s Analy s i s menu item: Pan the graph window Pan Select and move initial condition point Select Trace the graph of a solution curve Trace Register the coordinates at the location you tap on the Differential Equation Graph window as the i[...]

  • Page 807

    20060301 14-1-8 Diff erential Equation Graph Application Ov er view Differential Equation Graph Application Statu s Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Differential Equation Graph application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Rad Deg Cplx Real The angle unit setting is radians. The angle unit settin[...]

  • Page 808

    20060301 14-2-1 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation 14-2 Graphing a Fir s t Or der Diff erential Equation This section explains how to input a first order differential equation and draw a slope field, and how to graph the solution curve(s) of a first order differential equation based on given initial conditions. Inputting a Fir s t Or der[...]

  • Page 809

    20060301 14-2-2 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation (5) Tap  . • This draws the slope field of y ’ = y 2 – x . (6) Tap  , or tap and then tap [View Window] to display the View Window dialog box, and configure the View Window settings as shown below. • For details about View Window settings, see “Configuring Differential Eq[...]

  • Page 810

    20060301 14-2-3 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation Inputting Initial Condition s and Graphing the Solution Curve s of a Fir s t Or der Differential Equation You can use the procedure in this section to overlay, onto the slope field, solution curves of the first order differential equation input on the [DiffEq] tab for given initial condi[...]

  • Page 811

    20060301 14-2-4 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation Configuring Solution Curve Graph Setting s You can specify whether or not a solution curve should be drawn for each initial condition input on the initial condition editor. You can also specify either a normal or thick line for solution curves. S T o configure the s olution curve draw s [...]

  • Page 812

    20060301 14-2-5 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation (2) Tap the down arrow button on the toolbar. (3) Tap  on the toolbar to draw the solution curve with a thin line, or  to draw with a thick line. (4) To apply your setting to the graph, tap  .[...]

  • Page 813

    20060301 14-3-1 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation 14-3 Graphing a Second Or der Differential Equation This section explains how to input a second order differential equation and draw a slope field, and how to graph the solution curve(s) for a second order differential equation based on given initial conditions. With this application, a[...]

  • Page 814

    20060301 14-3-2 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation (4) Tap  . • This draws the phase plane of x ’ = x , y ’ = − y . Inputting Initial Condition s and Graphing the Solution Curve of a Second Or der Differential Equation You can use the procedure in this section to overlay, onto the slope field, solution curve of the second ord[...]

  • Page 815

    20060301 14-3-3 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation (4) Tap  . • This graphs the solution curve and overlays it on the phase plane of { x ’ = x , y ’ = − y }. 2 [Edit] - [Redraw] Tip • You can also draw a solution curve using [Modify] in the Analysis menu (page 14-1-7).[...]

  • Page 816

    20060301 14-4-1 Graphing an Nth-order Diff erential Equation 14-4 Graphing an Nth-or der Differential Equation This section explains how to graph the solution curve(s) for an nth order (higher order) differential equation based on specified initial conditions. With this application, an nth order differential equation is input in the form of a set o[...]

  • Page 817

    20060301 14-4-2 Graphing an Nth-order Diff erential Equation (5) Use the initial condition editor to input ( xi , y 1 i , y 2 i ) = (0, −1, 0), (0, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0). ? U E @ U ? U ? U ? U ? U ? U @ U ? U (6) Tap  . (Tapping 2 on this screen will cause the initial condition editor to fill the entire window.) 2 [Edit] - [Redraw][...]

  • Page 818

    20060301 14-5-1 Dra wing f ( x ) T ype Function Graphs and P arametr ic Function Graphs 14-5 Dra wing f ( x ) T ype Function Graph s and P arametric Function Graph s You can use the Differential Equation Graph application to graph f ( x ) type function graphs and parametric function graphs, the same way as you do with the Graph & Table applicat[...]

  • Page 819

    20060301 14-5-2 Dra wing f ( x ) T ype Function Graphs and P arametr ic Function Graphs Drawing a P arametric Function Graph Example: To graph { xt = 3sin( t ) + 1, yt = 3cos( t ) + 1} and { xt = sin( t ) − 1, yt = cos( t ) − 1} (Angle Unit Setting: radian, 0  t  2 P ) S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the [Graphs] tab to display the genera[...]

  • Page 820

    20060301 14-6-1 Configuring Differential Equation Gr aph View Window P arameters 14-6 Configuring Differential Equation Graph Vie w Windo w P arameter s You can set the x - and y -axis window settings, as well as a number of other general graphing parameters on the View Window dialog box. This dialog box contains two tabs. The first tab lets you se[...]

  • Page 821

    20060301 14-6-2 Configuring Differential Equation Gr aph View Window P arameters Differential Equation Graph View Window P arameter s I Window T ab Setting De s cription x min minimum value along the (horizontal) x -axis x max maximum value along the (horizontal) x -axis y min minimum value along the (vertical) y -axis y max maximum value along the[...]

  • Page 822

    20060301 14-6-3 Configuring Differential Equation Gr aph View Window P arameters I Solution s Ta b Setting De s cription Solution Dir. A solution curve is graphed starting at the initial condition value t 0 and continues until it reaches a target value, which can be either t min or t max. The solution direction determines the target values. Forward[...]

  • Page 823

    20060301 14-7-1 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations 14-7 Differential Equation Graph Window Operation s You can perform the following operations on the Differential Equation Graph window. • Graph zooming and scrolling • Modification of initial conditions (shifting the initial condition coordinates by dragging it) • Configuring new [...]

  • Page 824

    20060301 14-7-2 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations (1) Perform the operation under “Inputting an Nth-order Differential Equation and Initial Conditions, and then Graphing the Solutions” on page 14-4-1. • Performing all of the steps will produce a graph like the one shown below to appear on the Differential Equation Graph window. ([...]

  • Page 825

    20060301 14-7-3 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations S T o configure new initial condition s on the Diff erential Equation Graph window Example: After drawing the slope field of a first order differential equation, to configure initial condition settings on the Differential Equation Graph window (1) Perform the operation under “Inputtin[...]

  • Page 826

    20060301 14-7-4 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations The procedure for modifying the initial condition is the same as steps 3 and 4 under “To modify an initial condition on the Differential Equation Graph window” on page 14-7-1. • The newly configured initial condition is added to the initial condition editor. To view it, tap the [I[...]

  • Page 827

    20060301 14-7-5 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations S To s tar t a field trace (1) Draw a slope field or a phase plane. • See sections 14-2 and 14-3 for information about drawing a slope field or phase plane. (2) Tap  . • This will cause the  button to become highlighted, and will display a crosshair pointer ( ) near field line[...]

  • Page 828

    20060301 14-7-6 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations S T o perform a graph/curve trace operation (1) Draw a solution curve or general graph. • See sections 14-2 through 14-5 for information about drawing. (2) Tap  or [Analysis] - [Trace]. • This will cause the  button to become highlighted, and will display a crosshair pointer ([...]

  • Page 829

    20060301 14-7-7 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations (3) From the eActivity application menu, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [DiffEqGraph]. • This inserts a Differential Equation Graph data strip, and displays the Differential Equation Graph window in the lower half of the screen. S T o graph the s lope field and s olution curve s by d[...]

  • Page 830

    20060301 14-7-8 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations (6) Drag the stylus across “[0,1]” on the eActivity application window to select it. (7) Drag the selected matrix to the Differential Equation Graph window. • This graphs the solution curves of y ’ = exp( x ) + x 2 in accordance with the initial condition defined by the matrix a[...]

  • Page 831

    20060301 14-7-9 Diff erential Equation Graph Window Operations S T o graph the s olution curve s by dr opping an Nth-order diff erential equation and matrix into the Differential Equation Graph windo w Example: To drag the Nth-order differential equation y ” + y ’ = exp( x ) and then the initial condition matrix [[0, 1, 0][0, 2, 0]] from the eA[...]

  • Page 832

    20060301 (5) Drag the selected expression to the Differential Equation Graph window. • This registers y ” + y ’ = exp( x ) on the differential equation editor ([DiffEq] tab). The Differential Equation Graph window contents do not change at this time. (6) Drag the stylus across “[[0,1,0][0,2,0]]” on the eActivity application window to sele[...]

  • Page 833

    20060301 Chapter 15 U s ing the Financial Application This chapter explains how to use the Financial application. You can use the Financial application to perform a variety of financial calculations. 15-1 Financial Application Over view 15-2 Simple Intere s t 15-3 Compound Intere s t 15-4 Ca s h Flow 15-5 Amor tization 15-6 Intere s t Con ver s ion[...]

  • Page 834

    20060301 15-1-1 Financial Application Ov er view 15-1 Financial Application Over vie w This section explains how to use the Financial application initial screen, and describes the basic configuration of the Financial application windows. It also provides information on using the Financial application’s Help and Format features. Star ting Up the F[...]

  • Page 835

    20060301 Financial Application Menu s and Button s This section describes the basic configuration of Financial application windows, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. • For information about the menu, see “Using the Menu” on page 1-5-4. I Edit Menu T o do thi s : Select thi s Edit menu item: Cut the currently selecte[...]

  • Page 836

    20060301 T o perform thi s type of calculation: Select thi s Calculation s menu item: Amount that a business expense can be offset by income (depreciated) over a given year Depreciation Purchase price or annual yield of a bond Bond Calculation Amount you must sell to break even or to obtain a specified profit, as well as amount of profit or loss on[...]

  • Page 837

    20060301 Configuring Default Financial Application Setting s Most financial calculations require that you define certain general parameters that affect the results they produce. For example, you need to specify whether you use a 360-day or 365-day year, whether payments are made at the beginning of a period or end of a period, whether interest is c[...]

  • Page 838

    20070301 Financial Application P age s Selecting a calculation type from the Financial application [ Calculations ] menu will create and display a new “page”. Note the following rules that apply to Financial application pages. • You can scroll between pages using the toolbar  and  buttons. • Selecting the same calculation type as the [...]

  • Page 839

    20060301 • While the cursor is located in a calculation box, you can press the calculator’s  key to perform the calculation instead of tapping the button next to the box. Alternatively, you can tap “Solve” in the status bar to perform the calculation. I Help T ab Tapping the [Help] tab at the bottom of a financial calculation screen will[...]

  • Page 840

    20060301 15-1-7 Financial Application Ov er view I Statu s Bar The status bar shows the settings that apply to the calculations on the currently active page. You can change the settings by tapping them on the status bar. If the cursor is in an input/calculation box, “Solve” will appear on the left side of the status bar. You can tap this to com[...]

  • Page 841

    20060301 15-2 Simple Intere s t Simple Interest lets you calculate interest (without compounding) based on the number of days money is invested. Simple Intere s t Field s The following fields appear on the Simple Interest calculation page. Field De s cription Days Number of days in investment period I % Annual interest rate (as a percent) PV Presen[...]

  • Page 842

    20060301 I Example 2 What is the simple interest ([SI]) on a principal amount of $10,000 (PV) invested or borrowed for 120 days (Days) at 5% per annum ( I %)? • This indicates that the simple interest is $164.3835616. Calculation Form ula s 365-day Mode SI' = Dys 365 × PV × i I % 100 i = 360-day Mode SI' = Dys 360 × PV × i I % 100 i[...]

  • Page 843

    20060301 15-3 Compound Intere s t Compound Interest lets you calculate interest based on compounding parameters you specify. Compound Intere s t Field s The following fields appear on the Compound Interest calculation page. Field De s cription N Number of installment periods I % Annual interest rate (as a percent) PV Present value (initial investme[...]

  • Page 844

    20060301 15-3-2 Compound Interest I Example 3 What will be the value of an ordinary annuity at the end of 10 years if $100 is deposited each month into an account that earns 7% compounded monthly? I Example 2 If you deposit $100 into an account that earns 7% compounded monthly, how much will be in the account after three years?[...]

  • Page 845

    20060301 15-3-3 Compound Interest Calculation Form ula s S PV , PMT , FV , n I % & 0 I % = 0 PV = – ( PMT s n + FV ) FV = – ( PMT s n + PV ) PV = – × PMT – × FV β γ α PMT = – s PV – s FV FV = – s PV –  s PMT n = log (1+ iS ) × PMT – FV × i (1+ iS ) × PMT + PV × i {} log (1+ i ) PMT = – n PV +[...]

  • Page 846

    20060301 15-4-1 Cash Flow 15-4 Ca s h Flo w Cash Flow lets you calculate the value of money paid out or received in varying amounts over time. Ca s h Flow Field s The following fields appear on the Cash Flow calculation page. Field De s cription Cash List of income or expenses (up to 80 entries) I % Annual interest rate (as a percent) NPV Net prese[...]

  • Page 847

    20060301 (4) On the dialog box that appears, make sure “list1” is selected for “List variables”, and then tap [OK]. • You can now use the list of values in cash flow calculation. • To close the Stat Editor window, tap anywhere in the Stat Editor window and then tap the close box ( R ) in the upper right corner of the screen. • For det[...]

  • Page 848

    20060301 I Example 2 Suppose you were offered the investment in Example 1 at a cost of $1,000. What is the net present value (NPV) of the investment? What is the internal rate of return (IRR)? Note • When performing the calculations for Example 2, you need to enter the cost, as a negative value (–1000), in cell 1 of list1 in the stat editor. Af[...]

  • Page 849

    20060301 S IRR IRR is calculated using Newton’s Method. In this formula, NPV = 0, and the value of IRR is equivalent to i s 100. It should be noted, however, that minute fractional values tend to accumulate during the subsequent calculations performed automatically by the calculator, so NPV never actually reaches exactly zero. IRR becomes mor[...]

  • Page 850

    20060301 15-5-1 Amor tization 15-5 Amor tization Amortization lets you calculate the interest and principal portions of a payment or payments. Amor tization Field s The following fields appear on the Amortization calculation page. Field De s cription PM1 Number of first installment period in interval under consideration PM2 Number of last installme[...]

  • Page 851

    20060301 I Example 1 (Compound Intere s t) Use a Compound Interest page (page 15-3-1) to determine the monthly payment ([PMT]) on a 20-year (N = 20 × 12 = 240) mortgage with a loan amount (PV) of $100,000 at an annual rate ( I %) of 8.025%, compounded monthly (C/Y = 12). There are 12 payment periods per year (P/Y). Be sure to input zero for the fu[...]

  • Page 852

    20060301 15-5-3 Amor tization I Example 2 (Amortization) Use the monthly payment value you obtained in Example 1 (PMT = –837.9966279) to determine the following information for payment 10 (PM1) through 15 (PM2). As in Example 1, the mortgage has a loan amount (PV) of $100,000 at an annual rate ( I %) of 8.025%, compounded monthly (C/Y = 12) for 2[...]

  • Page 853

    20060301 15-5-4 Amor tization I%' = I% (1+ ) –1 [ C / Y ] [ P / Y ] 100 × [ C / Y ] { } × 100 i = I%' ÷ 100 Calculation Form ula s a : Interest portion of payment PM1 (INT) b : Principal portion of payment PM1 (PRN) c : Principal balance upon completion of payment PM2 (BAL) d : Total principal paid from payment PM1 to payment PM2 ( 3[...]

  • Page 854

    20060301 15-6-1 Interest Conv ersion 15-6 Intere s t Con ver s ion Interest Conversion lets you calculate the effective or nominal interest rate for interest that is compounded multiple times during a year. Intere s t Con ver s ion Field s The following fields appear on the Interest Conversion calculation page. Field De s cription N Number of times[...]

  • Page 855

    20060301 Tip • You can change any value and then tap a button to recalculate. Calculation Form ula s EFF = n APR/ 100 1+ –1 × 100 n A PR = 100 EFF 1+ –1 × n × 100 1 n 15-6-2 Interest Conv ersion I Example 2 What is the nominal interest rate ([APR]) on a certificate that offers an annual effective interest rate ([EFF]) of 5%, compounded bi-[...]

  • Page 856

    20060301 15-7-1 Cost /Sell/Margin 15-7 Co s t /Sell/Mar gin Cost /Sell/Margin lets you calculate the cost, selling price, or margin of profit on an item, given the other two values. Co s t /Sell/Margin Field s The following fields appear on the Cost /Sell/Margin calculation page. Field De s cription Cost Production cost Sell Selling price Margin Ma[...]

  • Page 857

    20060301 15-8-1 Da y Count 15-8 Da y Count Day Count lets you calculate the number of days between two dates, or the date that is a specified number of days from another date. Da y Count Field s The following fields appear on the Day Count calculation page. Field De s cription d1 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) d2 Month (1-12); Day (1-31[...]

  • Page 858

    20060301 I Example 3 What date (d1) comes 44 days ([Days]) before March 3, 2005 (d2)? 15-8-2 Da y Count I Example 2 What date (d2) comes 150 days ([Days]) after June 11, 2005 (d1)?[...]

  • Page 859

    20060301 15-9-1 Depreciation 15-9 Depreciation Depreciation lets you calculate the amount that a business expense can be offset by income (depreciated) over a given year. You can use a Depreciation page to calculate depreciation using one of four methods: straight-line, fixed-percentage, sum-of-the-years’-digits, or declining-balance. Depreciatio[...]

  • Page 860

    20060301 15-9-2 Depreciation Tip • At the end of the useful life the value of the computer will be 0, so we enter 0 in the FV field. I Example 1 Use the sum-of-the-years’-digits method ([SYD]) to calculate the first year ( j = 1) of depreciation on an $12,000 (PV) computer, with a useful life (N) of five years. Use a depreciation ratio ( I %) o[...]

  • Page 861

    20060301 I Example 2 Now calculate the depreciation amount ([SYD]) for the second year ( j = 2). Note • You can also tap [SL] to calculate depreciation using straight-line method, [FP] using fixed- percentage method, or [DB] using declining-balance method. • Each depreciation method will produce a different residual value after depreciation (RD[...]

  • Page 862

    20060301 I Fixed-P ercentage Method I Sum-of-the-Y ear s ’-Digit s Method I Dec lining-Balance Method 100 I% FP j = ( RDV j –1 + FV ) × 100 YR 1 I% FP 1 = PV × 12 × FP n +1 = RDV n ( YR 1 G 12) RDV 1 = PV – FV – FP 1 RDV j = RDV j –1 – FP j RDV n +1 = 0 ( YR 1 G 12) 12 YR 1 n' = n – n ( n + 1) Z = 2 2 ( Intg ( n' ) +1) ( [...]

  • Page 863

    20060301 15-10-1 Bond Calculation 15-10 Bond Calculation Bond Calculation lets you calculate the purchase price or the annual yield of a bond. Bond Calculation Field s The following fields appear on the Bond Calculation page. Field De s cription d1 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) d2 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) N Number of [...]

  • Page 864

    20060301 15-10-2 Bond Calculation I Example 1 You want to purchase a semiannual (Compounding Frequency = Semi-annual) corporate bond that matures on 12/15/2006 (d2) to settle on 6/1/2004 (d1). The bond is based on the 30/360 day-count method (Days in Year = 360 days) with a coupon rate (CPN) of 3%. The bond will be redeemed at 100% of its par value[...]

  • Page 865

    20060301 15-10-3 Bond Calculation I Example 2 For the same type of bond described in Example 1, calculate the price on the bond (PRC) based on a specific number of coupon payments (Term). • Before performing the calculation, you should use the [Format] tab to change the [Bond Interval] setting to “Term”, or tap “Date” in the status bar. T[...]

  • Page 866

    20060301 PRC : price per $100 of face value CPN : coupon rate (%) YLD : annual yield (%) A : accrued days M : number of coupon payments per year (1 = Annual, 2 = Semi-annual) N : number of coupon payments until maturity ( n is used when “Term” is specified for [Bond Interval] in the [Format] tab.) RDV : redemption price per $100 of face value D[...]

  • Page 867

    20060301 Bond Interval Setting: Term S Annual Yield (YLD) YLD is calculated using Newton’s Method. Note • The Financial application performs annual yield (YLD) calculations using Newton’s Method, which produces approximate values whose precision can be affected by various calculation conditions. Because of this, annual yield calculation resul[...]

  • Page 868

    20060301 15-11-1 Break-Ev en P oint 15-11 Break-Even P oint Break-Even Point lets you calculate the amount you must sell to break even or to obtain a specified profit, as well as the profit or loss on particular sales. Break-Even P oint Field s The following fields appear on the Break-Even Point calculation page. Field De s cription PRC Selling pri[...]

  • Page 869

    20060301 15-11-2 Break-Ev en P oint I Example 1 What is the break-even point sales amount ([SBE]) and sales quantity ([QBE]) required for a profit ([PRF]) of $400,000? Note • You need to calculate the break-even point sales quantity ([QBE]) before you will be able to calculate the break-even sales amount ([SBE]).[...]

  • Page 870

    20060301 I Example 2 What is the break-even point sales amount ([SBE]) and sales quantity ([QBE]) to attain a profit ratio ([r%]) of 40%? • For this example, use the [Format] tab to change the [Profit Amount/Ratio] setting to “Ratio ( r %)” or tap “PRF” in the status bar to change it to “ r %”. Calculation Form ula s S Pr ofit (Profit[...]

  • Page 871

    20060301 15-12-1 Margin of Saf ety 15-12 Mar gin of Safety Margin of Safety lets you calculate how much sales can be reduced before losses are incurred. Margin of Saf ety Field s The following fields appear on the Margin of Safety calculation page. Field De s cription SAL Amount obtained from sales SBE Break-even sales (amount that must be obtained[...]

  • Page 872

    20060301 15-13-1 Operating Le verage 15-13 Operating Le verage Operating leverage lets you calculate the degree of change in net earnings arising from a change in sales amount. Operating Levera ge Field s The following fields appear on the Operating Leverage calculation page. Field De s cription SAL Amount currently obtained from sales VC Variable [...]

  • Page 873

    20060301 15-14-1 Financial Le ver age 15-14 Financial Le verage Financial Leverage lets you calculate the degree of change in net earnings arising from a change in interest paid. Financial Levera ge Field s The following fields appear on the Financial Leverage calculation page. Field De s cription EBIT Earnings before interest and taxes INT Interes[...]

  • Page 874

    20060301 15-15-1 Combined Le ver age 15-15 Combined Le verage Combined Leverage lets you calculate the combined effects of operation and financial leverages. Combined Levera ge Field s The following fields appear on the Combined Leverage calculation page. Field De s cription SAL Amount obtained from sales VC Variable cost for this level of producti[...]

  • Page 875

    20060301 15-16-1 Quantity Conv ersion 15-16 Quantity Con ver s ion Quantity Conversion lets you calculate the number of items sold, selling price, or sales amount given the other two values. It also lets you calculate the number of items manufactured, unit variable cost, or total variable cost given the other two values. Quantity Con ver s ion Fiel[...]

  • Page 876

    20060301 15-16-2 Quantity Conv ersion • You can also calculate the variable cost per unit ([VCU]) or number of units manufactured ([QTY]) by inputting the other two values and tapping the button for the result you want. Calculation Form ula s I Example 2 Calculate the total variable costs of production (Manufacturing: [VC]) when the variable cost[...]

  • Page 877

    20060301 Chapter 16 Configuring Sy s tem Setting s The ClassPad unit’s System application lets you configure global system settings and access system information. 16-1 Sy s tem Setting Over view 16-2 Managing Memory U s ag e 16-3 U s ing the Re s et Dialog Box 16-4 Initializing Y our Cla ss Pa d 16-5 Adju s ting Di s play Contra s t 16-6 Configur[...]

  • Page 878

    20060301 16-1-1 System Setting Ov er view 16-1 Sy s tem Setting Overview This section describes the configuration of the System application window, and provides information about its menus and commands. Star ting Up the Sy s tem Application Use the following procedure to start up the System application. S Cla ss P ad Operation On the application me[...]

  • Page 879

    20060301 Sy s tem Application Menu s and Button s To perform an operation in the System application, select it on the [System] menu or tap the applicable toolbar button. T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Or s elect thi s Sy s tem menu item: Reset the ClassPad unit (which deletes all variable and program data in main memory and all eActivity data in[...]

  • Page 880

    20060301 16-2 Managing Memory U s ag e You can use [Memory Usage] to determine how much data is stored in the main memory and the storage area, and to delete data. [Memory Usage] appears first whenever you tap & on the application menu to start up the System application. [Memory Usage] contains the following four sheets. T o view thi s : Select[...]

  • Page 881

    20060301 Thi s item: Sho w s how m uch memory i s u s ed by thi s type of data: Graph Summary Summary table data View Window 2-dimensional View Window parameter values 3D View Window 3-dimensional View Window parameter values Factor Zoom factor values Table Range values and table result values Conics Eqn Conics expressions Sequence Sequential and r[...]

  • Page 882

    20060301 Deleting Memory U s age Data You can use the following procedure to delete memory usage data. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Tap the memory usage tab (Main Memory, Add-In App., eActivity, or Language) that contains the data you want to delete. (2) Select the check box next to the item whose data you want to delete. (3) Tap the [Delete] button[...]

  • Page 883

    20060301 16-3 U s ing the Re s et Dialog Bo x You can perform the following operations from the Reset dialog box. • Delete all variable and program data in main memory • Delete all eActivity data in storage memory S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap  to display t[...]

  • Page 884

    20060301 16-4 Initializing Y our Cla ss Pa d The initialization procedure provides you with a choice of two options. You can either clear the Flash ROM entire and return its data to the factory default state, or you can specify deletion of all user formulas and data, without deleting any currently installed add-in applications. W arning! Initializi[...]

  • Page 885

    20060301 (3) Adjust display contrast. T o do thi s : T ap thi s button: Make the display lighter Make the display darker Return contrast to its initial factory default setting Initial • Tapping and holding or continually performs the applicable operation until you release the button. (4) To close the Contrast dialog box, tap [Set]. 16-5 Adju s ti[...]

  • Page 886

    20060301 16-6 Configuring P o wer Pr oper tie s Use the Power Properties dialog box to configure the power saving mode and auto power off (APO) settings. P ower Sa ving Mode Your ClassPad has a “resume” feature that remembers its status when you turn it off, and restores the same status the next time you turn the ClassPad back on. Resume featur[...]

  • Page 887

    20060301 Configuring P ower Pr oper tie s S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap 8 to display the Power Properties dialog box. (3) Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page 16-6-1 for details[...]

  • Page 888

    20060301 16-7 Specifying the Di s pla y Language You can use the following procedure to specify German, English, Spanish, French, or Portuguese as the display language. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap # to display the Language dialog box. (3) In the list of language[...]

  • Page 889

    20060301 16-8-1 Specifying the F ont Set 16-8 Specifying the Font Set You can select either “Regular” or “Bolder” as the display font type. Regular Bolder Text Input Menu S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap = to display the Font Select dialog box. (3) In the lis[...]

  • Page 890

    20090601 16-9 Specifying the Alphabetic Ke yboar d Arrangement The Keyboard dialog box lets you select from among three different key arrangements for the alphabetic (abc) soft keyboard: QWERTY, AZERTY, or QWERTZ. The initial default setting is QWERTY. QWERTZ S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the Sy[...]

  • Page 891

    20060301 16-10 Optimizing “Fla s h R OM” Use the following procedure to perform a “garbage collection” operation that optimizes Flash ROM. Optimizing Flash ROM increases the amount of memory available for storage. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap  . • Th[...]

  • Page 892

    20060301 16-11 Specifying the Ending Screen Ima g e Whenever you press the 0 key to turn off the ClassPad unit, it copies any data currently in RAM to Flash ROM, and then turns off power. The ending screen is what appears on the display while the RAM data save operation is being performed, until power is actually turned off. You can specify the ima[...]

  • Page 893

    20060301 16-12 Adju s ting T ouc h P anel Alignment You should adjust touch panel alignment whenever you find that the wrong operation or no operation is performed when you tap the ClassPad screen. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap - to display the touch panel alignme[...]

  • Page 894

    20060301 16-13 Vie wing V er s ion Inf ormation Use the following procedure when you want to view version information about your ClassPad’s operating system. S T o view s oftware ver s ion inf ormation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap  to display the Version dialog box. (3) To close th[...]

  • Page 895

    20060301 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [ClassPad Name] to display the ClassPad Name dialog box. (3) Enter your name on the dialog box. 16-14 Regi s tering a U s er Name on a Cla ss Pa d You can register your name on your ClassPad so it appears at[...]

  • Page 896

    20060301 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [Imaginary Unit] to display the Imaginary Unit dialog box. (3) On the Imaginary Unit dialog box, select the type of imaginary unit you want to use. 16-15 Specifying the Comple x Number Imaginary Unit In math[...]

  • Page 897

    20090601 S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap & . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [Shift Keys] to display the Shift Key Assign dialog box. (3) On the Shift Key Assign dialog box, select the “Set ( – ) as shift key” check box. (4) Tap the down arrow button then select the hard key to[...]

  • Page 898

    20090601 16-16-2 Assigning Shift Mode K ey Operations to Hard K eys • To assign the Cut, Copy, Paste, or Undo/Redo operation, tap the applicable button on the dialog box. • To clear the current assignment from the hard key, tap [Clear Assignment]. (6) After all the settings are the way you want, tap [OK] to apply them and close the Shift Key As[...]

  • Page 899

    20060301 P erf orming Data Comm unication You can use the SB-62 data communication cable to connect your ClassPad to another ClassPad unit or to a CASIO Data Analyzer, and transfer data between them. To transfer data between a ClassPad and a personal computer, you need to use the special USB cable that comes with ClassPad. This chapter explains how[...]

  • Page 900

    20060301 17-1 Data Comm unication Overview This section provides an overview of the types of connections that are possible, and the data that can be transferred over each connection. It also tells you how to use the Communication application to transfer data. 17-1-1 Data Communication Ov er view Impor tant! • Never press the P button on the back [...]

  • Page 901

    20060301 20070301 17-1-2 Data Communication Ov er view I Connecting a Cla ss P ad to a Computer You can perform the following operations when connected to a computer. • Transfer variable data and eActivity data between the ClassPad and a computer • Install add-in applications, language data, and operating system upgrades onto your ClassPad from[...]

  • Page 902

    20060301 17-1-3 Data Communication Ov er view S How to T ran s fer Data Use the “Send38k” and “Receive38k” program commands to transfer data. For details, see “Chapter 12 – Using the Program Application”, and the user documentation that comes with the Data Analyzer. U s ing the Cla ss P ad Comm unication Application To perform a data [...]

  • Page 903

    20060301 17-2-1 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device 17-2 Connecting the Cla ss P ad to Another De vice This section provides detailed explanations about how to connect the ClassPad to another ClassPad unit, to a computer, and to a CASIO Data Analyzer. Connecting to Another Cla ss P ad Unit Use the procedure below to connect two ClassPad unit[...]

  • Page 904

    20060301 17-2-2 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device Connecting to an EA-200 Data Analyzer You can use the CASIO Data Analyzer to sample and collect data on various everyday natural phenomena. You can also connect the Data Analyzer to your ClassPad, and control Data Analyzer operation from your ClassPad. You can transfer setup information fro[...]

  • Page 905

    20060301 20070301 17-2-3 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device Connecting to a Computer (USB) By running FA-CP1 software that comes with ClassPad on your computer, you can transfer ClassPad data to your computer. See the FA-CP1 User’s Guide for information about how to use it. • For information about FA-CP1 minimum computer system requirem[...]

  • Page 906

    20060301 17-3-1 Configuring Communication P arameters 17-3 Configuring Comm unication P arameter s Before trying to transfer data with the ClassPad, you should perform the procedures described in this section to configure its data communication parameters. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap  . • This starts the Communicat[...]

  • Page 907

    20060301 17-3-2 Configuring Communication P arameters The above setting specifies the data rate when connected to another ClassPad, or a Data Analyzer. Note that you must set the data rate (baud rate) for both the ClassPad and the connected device so they are identical. S W akeup Enable T o do this: T urn on the wakeup function (see belo w) T urn [...]

  • Page 908

    20060301 20070301 17-3-3 Configuring Communication P arameters I When connected to a computer’ s USB por t Wakeup activates as soon as you connect the cable to the ClassPad, and the ClassPad automatically performs the following steps. (1) If the ClassPad is off when the cable is connected, it turns on. (2) The currently running application is exi[...]

  • Page 909

    20060301 17-4-1 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit 17-4 T ran s ferring Data to Another Cla ss P ad Unit This section details the steps you should perform in order to transfer data from one ClassPad unit to another. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) Use the procedure under “Connecting to Another ClassPad Unit” on page 17-2-1 to connect th[...]

  • Page 910

    20060301 Sender (6) In response to the confirmation message that appears, tap [OK] to send the data or [Cancel] to cancel the send operation. • Sender Tapping [OK] sends the data you selected in step (4). • Receiv er If the receiving device has wakeup enabled, it automatically starts receiving the data. Sender (7) The message “Complete!” ap[...]

  • Page 911

    20060301 17-4-3 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit Selecting Data f or T ran s fer Perform the following steps on the sending device to select the data you want to send in step (3) of the procedure on page 17-4-1. S Cla ss P ad Operation (1) In the Communication application, tap [Link] and then [Transmit], or tap D to display the Select[...]

  • Page 912

    20060301 17-4-4 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit • To return to the folder list from a list of folder contents, tap ( in the lower left corner of the window. • You can transfer all of the variables or data in a folder by selecting the check box next to the folder name on the data folder list or eActivity folder list. (4) Tap [OK] [...]

  • Page 913

    20060301 17-4-5 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit Sending a Screen s hot of the Current Di s pla y Content s Use the following procedure to send the current display contents of your ClassPad to another ClassPad unit. Impor tant! Screenshot transfer is disabled when either of the following conditions exists. • While a calculation or g[...]

  • Page 914

    20060301 17-4-6 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit Comm unication Standby The ClassPad enters “communication standby” when you perform a send or receive operation. While in communication standby, the ClassPad waits for the other unit to send data, or for it to get ready to receive data. The following describes how communication stan[...]

  • Page 915

    20060301 Appendix 1 Re s etting and Initializing the Cla ss Pa d 2 Deleting an Application 3 P ower Supply 4 Number of Digit s and Preci s ion 5 Specification s 6 Character Code T able 7 Sy s tem V ariable T able 8 Command and Function Index 9 Graph T ype s and Executable Function s 10 Err or Me ss age T a ble A[...]

  • Page 916

    20060301 1 Re s etting and Initializing the Cla ss P ad The memory of your ClassPad is divided into three parts: main memory, a storage area for storing data, and a RAM area for executing various calculations and operations. Reset and initialize restore normal ClassPad operation after some problem occurs. RAM Re s et Perform RAM reset when the Clas[...]

  • Page 917

    20060301 I P erf orming the RAM Re s et Operation You should perform the RAM reset operation whenever your ClassPad freezes up or when it begins to operate abnormally for some reason. The RAM reset operation should restore normal ClassPad operation. Impor tant! • The RAM reset operation deletes all data that is temporarily stored in ClassPad RAM.[...]

  • Page 918

    20060301 2 Deleting an Application You can delete an add-in application by deleting it from the application menu or by using the [Add-In App.] Memory Usage sheet of the System application as described in Chapter 16. The following procedure shows how to delete an add-in application from the application menu only. For information about using the Syst[...]

  • Page 919

    20060301 3 P ower Supply Your ClassPad is powered by four AAA-size batteries LR03 (AM4). The battery level indicator is displayed in the status bar. ........................ full ..................... medium ....................... low Impor tant! • Be sure to replace batteries as soon as possible whenever the battery level indicator shows (mediu[...]

  • Page 920

    20060301 I Replacing Batterie s Precaution s : Incorrectly using batteries can cause them to burst or leak, possibly damaging the interior of the ClassPad. Note the following precautions: • Be sure that the positive (+) and negative (–) poles of each battery are facing in the proper directions. • Never mix batteries of different types. • Ne[...]

  • Page 921

    20060301 P (3) Remove the battery cover from the ClassPad by pulling with your finger at the point marked  . (6) Replace the battery cover. (7) Turn the ClassPad front side up and remove its front cover. (8) Align the touch panel. a. Your ClassPad should turn on automatically and display the Touch Panel Alignment screen. b. Tap the center of eac[...]

  • Page 922

    20060301 (9) Adjust the display contrast. a. Tap the button to make contrast darker, or the button to make it lighter. b. After the contrast setting is the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Initial] on the Contrast dialog box returns contrast to its initial factory default setting. (10) Specify the display language. a. On the list that appears,[...]

  • Page 923

    20060301 A -3-5 P ower Supply (13) Configure power properties. a. Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page16-6-1 for details about these settings. b. When the configurations are the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects “1 day” for [Power Save Mod[...]

  • Page 924

    20060301 4 Number of Digit s and Preci s ion I Number of Digit s Standard Mode The following applies when the check box next to the “Decimal Calculation” item on the Basic Format dialog box is not selected. • Up to 611 digits are stored in memory for integer values. • Decimal values up to 15 digits are converted to fraction format and saved[...]

  • Page 925

    20060301 5 Specification s Calculation range: p 1 s 10 –999 to p 9.999999999 s 10 999 and 0. Internal operations use 15-digit mantissa. Exponential di s play range: Normal 1: 10 –2 > | x |, | x |  10 10 Normal 2: 10 –9 > | x |, | x |  10 10 Program capacity: 515000 bytes (max.) P ower s upply: Four AAA-size batteries LR03 (AM4) P [...]

  • Page 926

    20060301 Po r t : 3-pin data communication port 4-pin mini USB port • For information about FA-CP1 minimum computer system requirements, see the FA-CP1 User’s Guide. Method: Start-stop (asynchronous), full-duplex T ran s mi ss ion s peed (BPS): 115200/38400/9600 bits/second (normal) 38400 bits/second (Send38k/Receive38k) P arity: None Bit lengt[...]

  • Page 927

    20020801 20060301 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 6 Character Code T able Characters from character code 257 onwards are 2-byte characters. 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 12[...]

  • Page 928

    20020801 20060301 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 [...]

  • Page 929

    20020801 20060301 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 [...]

  • Page 930

    20020801 20060301 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 [...]

  • Page 931

    20060301 7 Sy s tem V ariable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default a 0 Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 a 1 Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 a 2 Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 a Coef Regression Coefficient a – – EXPR (Real Number) ac Seq Sequence Graph Trace Variable – – EXPR (Real Num[...]

  • Page 932

    20060301 Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default b n E Sequence Expression 55 STR b n E 0 Recursion Internal Variable – – EXPR (Real Number) b n Start Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 c 0 Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 c 1 Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 c 2 Sequence Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Numbe[...]

  • Page 933

    20090601 Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default GconHStart Graph Transformation Vertical Start Point – – EXPR (Real Number) 1 GconHStep Graph Transformation Vertical Step Value – – EXPR (Real Number) 1 GconWEnd Graph Transformation Horizontal End Point – – EXPR (Real Number) 5 GconWStart Graph Transformation Horizontal Start Po[...]

  • Page 934

    20090601 Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default ModeFStat Frequency of Mode Values (Statistics Calculation) – – EXPR (Real Number) ModeNStat Number of Mode Values (Statistics Calculation) – – EXPR (Real Number) ModeStat Mode Value (Statistics Calculation) – – LIST {Real Number} MSe Mean Square Error for Regression – – EXPR [...]

  • Page 935

    20090601 A -7-5 System V ar iable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default SqResult Sequence Result Variable – – MAT SqStart Sequence Creation Variable 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 1 Sres11 Calculation Result for StatGraph1 – – LIST {Real Number} Sres12 Calculation Result for StatGraph1 – – LIST {Real Number} Sres21 Calculatio[...]

  • Page 936

    20090601 A -7-6 System V ar iable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default tUpper Result of TCD Calculation – – EXPR (Real Number) Tvalue t Value – – EXPR (Real Number) t Q max View Window T Q  Maximum Value 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 2 P t Q min View Window T Q  Minimum Value 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 0 t Q Step View Windo[...]

  • Page 937

    20090601 A -7-7 System V ar iable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default ymax View Window Display Range y -axis Maximum Value 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 3.8 ymax3D 3D Graph View Window Display Range y -axis Maximum Value 5 – EXPR (Real Number) 3 ymin View Window Display Range y -axis Minimum Value 5 – EXPR (Real Number) –3.8 ymi[...]

  • Page 938

    20090601 8 Command and Function Inde x A -8-1 Command and Function Inde x Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Pa ge abExpR Cmd 12-6-32 abExpReg Cmd 12-6-27 abs Func 2-4-5 absExpand Func 2-8-45 : h and Cmd 2-8-46 andConnect Func 2-8-45 angle Func 2-8-40 approx Func 2-8-3 arcLen Func 2-8-16 arg Func 2-8-19 arrange Func 2-8-47 augment Fun[...]

  • Page 939

    20090601 A -8-2 Command and Function Inde x Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Pa ge DispSeqTbl Cmd 12-6-25 DispSmryTbl Cmd 12-6-16 DispStat Cmd 2-8-57, 12-6-28 DispText Cmd 12-6-6 Distance Cmd 12-6-16 dms Func 2-8-7 Do~LpWhile Cmd 12-6-9 Dot Cmd 12-6-32 dotP Func 2-8-40 DrawConics Cmd 12-6-25 DrawFTGCon, DrawFTGPlot Cmd 12-6-16 DrawG[...]

  • Page 940

    20090601 A -8-3 Command and Function Inde x Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Pa ge invBinomialCDf Func 2-8-53 InvChiCD Cmd 7-11-11 invChiCDf Func 2-8-51 Inverse Cmd 12-6-18 invert Func 2-8-47 InvFCD Cmd 7-11-14 invFCDf Func 2-8-52 InvFourier Func 2-8-9 InvGeoCD Cmd 7-11-23 invGeoCDf Func 2-8-55 InvHypergeoCD Cmd 7-11-26 invHypergeoC[...]

  • Page 941

    20090601 A -8-4 Command and Function Inde x Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Pa ge OneSampleZInt Cmd 7-10-3 OneSampleZTest Cmd 7-9-3 OneVariable Cmd 12-6-30 OneWayANOVA Cmd 7-9-18 OpenComPort38k Cmd 12-6-46 : h or Cmd 2-8-46 Pause Cmd 12-6-13 percent Func 2-8-29 percentile Func 2-8-27 piecewise Func 2-4-12 Plot Cmd 12-6-18 PlotChg C[...]

  • Page 942

    20090601 A -8-5 Command and Function Inde x Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Pa ge SetDegree Cmd 12-6-34 SetDeriv Cmd 12-6-34 SetDispGCon Cmd 12-6-35 SetDrawCon Cmd 12-6-35 SetDrawPlt Cmd 12-6-35 SetFix Cmd 12-6-35 SetFolder Cmd 12-6-41 SetFunc Cmd 12-6-35 SetGrad Cmd 12-6-35 SetGrid Cmd 12-6-35 SetLabel Cmd 12-6-35 SetLabel3D Cmd 1[...]

  • Page 943

    20090601 A -8-6 Command and Function Inde x Command/Function Form Page toCyl Func 2-8-42 toDMS Func 2-8-7 toFrac Func 2-8-6 toPol Func 2-8-41 toRect Func 2-8-41 toSph Func 2-8-41 TPD Cmd 7-11-7 tPDf Func 2-8-50 trigToExp Func 2-8-6 trn Func 2-8-31 TwoPropZInt Cmd 7-10-7 TwoPropZTest Cmd 7-9-7 TwoSampleFTest Cmd 7-9-17 TwoSampleTInt Cmd 7-10-10 TwoS[...]

  • Page 944

    20060301 A -9-1 Graph T ypes and Ex ecutable Functions 9 Graph T ype s and Ex ecutable Function s 5 : Executable  : Not executable # : Executable with some conditions Zoom Gr a ph T ype Function An a lysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Origin a l Squ a re Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes Tr a ce Cls Plot Line T ext Norm a l Inverse Ci[...]

  • Page 945

    20060301 A -9-2 Graph T ypes and Ex ecutable Functions Zoom Gr a ph T ype Function An a lysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Origin a l Squ a re Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes Tr a ce Cls Plot Line T ext Norm a l Inverse Circle Vertic a l Horizont a l Root M a x Min Intersect Inflection Dist a nce  f ( x ) 2 d x [...]

  • Page 946

    20060301 A -9-3 Graph T ypes and Ex ecutable Functions • Histogram • Broken Zoom Gr a ph T ype Function An a lysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Origin a l Squ a re Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes Tr a ce Cls Plot Line T ext Norm a l Inverse Circle Vertic a l Horizont a l Root M a x Min Intersect Inflection Dist a nce ?[...]

  • Page 947

    20060301 A -9-4 Graph T ypes and Ex ecutable Functions Statistical - Box • MedBox • ModBox Zoom Gr a ph T ype Function An a lysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Origin a l Squ a re Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes Tr a ce Cls Plot Line T ext Norm a l Inverse Circle Vertic a l Horizont a l Root M a x Min Intersect Inflection Dist a nce[...]

  • Page 948

    20060301 A -10-1 Error Message T able 10 Err or Me ss ag e T a ble I Err or Me ss age T able Error Me ss age De s cription A single presentation can contain up to 60 pages. – Access to Flash ROM – Argument must be a variable name – Can’t Create – Can’t Delete – Can’t Edit – Can’t Rename – Can’t Transform into This Type – C[...]

  • Page 949

    20060301 A -10-2 Error Message T able Error Me ss age De s cription Folder The folder name you specified for a command argument does not exist. Or you have input the name of a folder that cannot be specified (“library” folder, etc.) Function has invalid variable name – Function Type The expression type that is selected cannot execute a functi[...]

  • Page 950

    20060301 A -10-3 Error Message T able Error Me ss age De s cription Invalid Outside Function or Program You are trying to execute a command that must be used inside of a program as a local command, outside of a program. Invalid Path You are trying to specify an invalid path. This error occurs when you include a system folder in a path, when you inc[...]

  • Page 951

    20060301 A -10-4 Error Message T able Error Me ss age De s cription Non-Real in Calc The ClassPad is in the Real mode but   the value you are inputting or the result produced by a calculation is a complex number. Not a Local Variable The variable you are trying to assign data to is not a local variable. Not a Numerical Value Result – Not an Emp[...]

  • Page 952

    20060301 I W arning Me ss age T able A -10-5 Error Message T able I Low Memory Err or Proce ss ing An error occurs on the ClassPad if it is unable to reserve enough work area memory to perform a particular operation. When a low memory error occurs, any application in use at that point is shut down and an error message like the one shown below appe[...]

  • Page 953

    This mark applies in EU countries only. Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: CASIO EUROPE GmbH Casio-Platz 1 22848 Norderstedt, Germany[...]

  • Page 954

    CASIO COMPUTER CO ., L TD . 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, T okyo 151-8543, Japan One or more of the following patents may be used in the pr oduct. U.S.Pats. 5,539,867 SA0911-B[...]